all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 5.18 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.41 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.83 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
Users Manual 4 | Users Manual | 3.75 MiB | ||||
1 | Block Diagram | |||||||
1 | External Photos | |||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 | Test Report | |||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos |
1 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 5.18 MiB |
Users Guide Users Guide C267x series BASIC BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting on Windows. ADVANCED This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments. Some features may not be available depending on models or countries. 1. Introduction This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine. Key benefits Features by model Useful to know About this users guide Safety information Machine overview Control panel overview Turning on the machine Reinstalling the driver Installing the driver locally 3 6 12 13 14 20 23 25 26 28 Key benefits Environmentally friendly To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco printing" on page 57). To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
(see "Using advanced print features" on page 260). To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided printing) (see "Using advanced print features" on page 260). To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy. Fast high resolution printing You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600 x 600 x 4 bit). Fast, on-demand printing. For single-side printing, up to 26 ppm (A4) or up to 27 ppm (Letter). Convenience Simply touch your mobile device on the NFC tag on your printer and get the print job done (see "Using the NFC feature" on page 204). You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google Cloud Print enabled apps(see "Google Cloud Print" on page 212). Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard(see "Easy Capture Manager" on page 296). Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machines status and allows you to customize the machines settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 308or "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 305). Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
"Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 304). AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 298). Key benefits Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available only for Windows. If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads. Wide range of functionality and application support Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 131). Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as Confidential (see "Using advanced print features" on page 260). You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on page 137). Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface. Supports various wireless network setting method Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button
- You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on the machine and the access point (a wireless router). Using the USB cable or a network cable
- You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB cable or a network cable. Using the Wi-Fi Direct
- You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct feature. See "Introducing wireless set up methods" on page 178. Key benefits Support XOA applications The machine supports XOA custom applications. Regarding the XOA custom applications, please contact your XOA custom application provider. Features by model Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country. Operating System Operating System C267xFW Windows Mac Linux Unix
(: Included, Blank: Not available) Software You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive. For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window. SPL printer driver PCL printer driver PS printer drivera XPS printer drivera Software C267xFW Features by model Software C267xFW Direct Printing Utilitya Samsung Easy Printer Manager Scan to PC settings Fax to PC settings Device Settings Samsung Printer Status Samsung AnyWeb Printa Samsung Easy Document Creator Easy Capture Manager Samsung Easy Color Managera SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Admin Web Service Easy Eco Driver Fax Scan Samsung Network PC Fax Twain scan driver WIA scan driver a. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com
> find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing, check whether your computers OS support the software.
(: Included, Blank: Not available) Features by model Variety feature Features C267xFW Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/
1000 Base TX wired LAN IEEE 1284B porta Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LANb NFC (Near Field Communication) Google Cloud Print AirPrint Eco printing Duplex (2-sided) printing Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual)cd USB memory interface Memory module Optional tray (Tray2) Mass Storage Device e Features by model Features C267xFW Document Feeder Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF) Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Handset Fax Multi-send Delay send Priority send Duplex send Secure receive Duplex print Send/ Receive forward -
fax Send/ Receive forward -
email Send/ Receive forward -
server Features by model Features C267xFW Scan Scanning to email Scanning to SMB server Scanning to FTP server Duplex scan Scan to PC Copy ID card copying Reduced or enlarged copying Collation Poster Clone Auto Fit Book 2-up/4-up Adjust background Margin shift Edge erase Gray enhance Duplex copy Features by model a. If you use the parallel port, you cannot use the USB cable. b. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some countries, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine. c. Available for Windows OS only. d. Only tray1 is supported. e. The machine is equipped with 4GB of SD (secure digital) card.
(: Included, : Optional, Blank: Not available) Useful to know The machine does not print. A paper jam has occurred. Open the print queue list and remove the document from the list (see "Canceling a print job" on page 54). Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 26). Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows
(see "Setting your machine as a default machine" on page 259). Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer. Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region to view product service information. Open and close the door (see "Front view" on page 21). Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 111). Printouts are blurry. The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner cartridge (see "Redistributing toner" on page 84). Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). The status LED flashes or remains constantly on. Where can I download the machines driver?
Turn the product off and on again. Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the status LED"
on page 120). You can get help, support application, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads. About this users guide This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage. 2 General icons Read the safety information before using the machine. If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. Terms used in this users guide are explained in the glossary chapter. All illustrations in this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model you purchased. The screenshots in this users guide may differ from your machine depending on the machines firmware/driver version. The procedures in this users guide are mainly based on Windows 7. 1 Conventions Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
Document is synonymous with original. Paper is synonymous with media, or print media. Machine refers to printer or MFP. Icon Text Description Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Warning Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury. Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature. 1. Introduction 13 Safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. 4 Operating environment Warning 3 Important safety symbols Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). This could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out. This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. This could result in electric shock or fire. 1. Introduction 14 Safety information Caution 5 Operating method During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution Be careful, the paper output area is hot. Burns could occur. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords. This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. It can cause damage to the machine. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. You may get injured. Be careful when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. Burns can occur. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. It can damage the machine. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. It can damage the machine. 1. Introduction 15 Safety information Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This machine's power reception device is the power cord. To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. 6 Installation / Moving Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water leaks. This could result in electric shock or fire. Place the machine in the environment where it meets the operating temperature and humidity specification. Otherwise, quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine (see
"General specifications" on page 129). Caution Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the units weight. If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate amount of people to lift the device safely. Then lift the machine:
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person. If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 2 people. If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or more people. The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover and trays. The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light, heat, and humidity. When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a well-
ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically. 1. Introduction 16 Safety information Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6 feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. a. AWG: American Wire Gauge 7 Maintenance / Checking Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. You could get injured. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. Children could get hurt. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repairing. 1. Introduction 17 Safety information To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. Otherwise, you could damage the machine. Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in fire or electric shock. The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician. 8 Supply usage Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. For supplies that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste toner bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below. When disposing of the supplies, follow the instructions for disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions. Do not wash the supplies. For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the bottle. If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does not cover damages caused by a users carelessness. When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash it. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water. 1. Introduction 18 Safety information When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. 1. Introduction 19 Machine overview 9 Components Machine Power cord Quick installation guide Software CDa Misc. accessoriesb a. The software CD contains the print drivers, users guide, and software applications. b. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model. 1. Introduction 20 Machine overview Front view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model. There are various types of machine. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 6). 10 1 2 14 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 11 10 9 24 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) cover Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) width guide Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) input tray Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) output tray 13 14 15 16 Output tray Document feeder output support Front cover handle Scanner lid Control panel 17 Scanner glass Control board cover Front cover Tray 1 Optional traya 10 Push-release of Multi-purpose tray 18 Paper width guides on a multi-
purpose tray 19 Multi-purpose support tray 20 21 22 Toner cartridge Toner cartridge handle Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 11 Multi-purpose tray 23 Duplex jam cover 12 USB memory port a. This is an optional feature. 24 NFC tag (Near Field Communication) 1. Introduction 21 Machine overview Rear view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model. There are various types of machine. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 6). 11 9 10 8 7 6 5 4 1 1 3 2 7 USB port 8 Network port Power receptacle Power-switch 5V output port for IEEE 1284B Porta 9 Telephone line socket (LINE) 1 Waster toner container 2 Rear cover 3 Rear cover handle 4 5 6 a. The optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port. 10 Extension telephone socket (EXT.) 1. Introduction 22 Control panel overview This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. There are various types of control panels. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 6). Some buttons may not work depending on the mode (copy, fax, or scan). 1 Display screen Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation. 2 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 253). 3 4 Clear Stop Deletes characters in the edit area. Stops an operations at any time. 1. Introduction 23 Control panel overview 5 6 7 Power/Wake Up Start On Hook Dial 8 Help 9 Reset 10 Wireless LED 11 Status LED Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button for more than three seconds. Starts a job in black or color mode. When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone
(see "Receiving manually in Tel mode" on page 288). Gives detailed information about this machines menus or status. Resets the current machines setup. Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 120). Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 120). 1. Introduction 24 Turning on the machine Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). 1 Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. 2 Turn the power switch on. 2 1 1. Introduction 25 Installing the driver locally A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network connected machines driver (see
"Installing driver over the network" on page 166). 12 Windows 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. If you are a Mac Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
"Installation for Mac" on page 157 or "Installation for Linux" on page 159 or "Installing the UNIX printer driver package" on page 171. 2 The installation window in this Users Guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use. Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches). Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run. X:\Setup.exe replacing X with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK. For Windows 8, If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing X with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. If Tap to choose what happens with this disc. pop-up window appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe. 3 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window. Then, click Next. 1. Introduction 26 Installing the driver locally Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Next. Follow the instructions in the installation window. You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install window. 4 5 From the Windows 8 Start Screen The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads. You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store. 1 From Charms, select Search. 2 Click Store. 3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience. 4 Click Install. If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads. If you want to install Samsungs printer management tools, you need to install them using the supplied software CD. 1 Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered on. 2 Make sure that the machine is powered on. 3 Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable. The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update. 1. Introduction 27 Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall the driver. 13 Windows 1 From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Uninstall Samsung Printer Software. 2 3 Follow the instructions in the installation window. Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 26). From the Windows 8 Start Screen 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start screen. 3 Follow the instructions in the window. If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the desktop screen mode. If you want to uninstall Samsungs printer management tools, from the Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program you want to delete Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window. 1. Introduction 28 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options. Menu overview Machines basic settings Media and tray Basic printing Basic copying Basic scanning Basic faxing Using USB memory device 30 37 39 53 60 65 66 70 Menu overview The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machines functions. An checked () appears next to the currently selected menu. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting Menus" on page 215). You can set menus easily using the touch screen. The Main screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel. Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 30 Menu overview 1 Introducing the Home Screen
(Eco): You can view the eco settings.
(Direct USB): Enters the USB menu when USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine.
(Document Box): You can store the printing data, print the secure page or shared folder.
: Shows the toner status
: Selects the LCD brightnessand language.
: Scroll through available options.
(Copy): When you press Copy from the display screen, the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options.
(Scan): When you press Scan from the display screen, the Scan screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning options.
(Fax): When you press Fax from the display screen, the Fax screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing options.
(Setup): You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.
(Job Status): Job status shows the jobs currently running, completed job or in queue. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 31 Menu overview Basic Copy Darkness Original Type Text Text/Photo Photo Magazine Color Mode Auto Color Mono Custom Copy Duplex Reduce/Enlarge Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type Tray Copy
(see "Copy" on page 218) Auto Tray1 Tray2a MP Tray Manual Feeder Layout Off Collation 2-up 4-up ID Copy Book Copy Adjust Background Edge Erase Off SmallOriginal Hole Punch Book Centerb Border Erase Stamp Item Opacity Position Watermark ID Copy Darkness Color Mode Color Mono Auto Fit Copy Darkness Original Type Color Mode Collate Copy Duplex Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type N-up Copy Duplex Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type N-up Book Copy Darkness Color Mode Original Size Original Type Book Copy a. This is an optional feature. b. This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy. Fax
(see "Fax" on page 224) Memory Send Darkness Resolution Duplex Original Type Original Size Color Mode On Hook Dial Darkness Resolution Duplex Original Type Original Size Color Mode Delayed Send Darkness Resolution Duplex Original Type Original Size SpeedDial Send Darkness Resolution Duplex Original Type Original Size Color Mode Group Dial Send Darkness Resolution Duplex Original Type Original Size Color Mode Redial Darkness Resolution Duplex Original Type Original Size Color Mode 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 32 Menu overview Local PC Send Email Destination Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Original Size Original Type Darkness Network PC Destination Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Original Size Original Type Darkness To Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Darkness File Name SMB Destination Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Scan
(see "Scan" on page 229) Duplex Darkness File Name FTP Destination Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Darkness File Name Custom Email To Subject From CC BCC Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Darkness File Name USB Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Darkness File Policy Shared Folder Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Darkness File Policy WSD Eco
(see "Eco" on page 247) Eco-On On Off Settings Default Mode On Off On-Forcedb Feature Configuration Default Custom a. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 33 Menu overview b. If you set the eco mode on with a passwcode from the SyncThru Web Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or (Device Settings
> Eco), the On force message appears. You have to enter the passcode to change the eco mode status. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 34 Menu overview Direct USB
(see "Direct USB"
on page 248) Print From Machine Setup Auto Fit Copies Duplex Select Tray Color Mode Scan to USB Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryptiona Duplex Darkness File Policy File Manage Show Space Default Setting Copy Default Scan Default Fax Default Paper Setup Tray1 Tray2b MP Tray Manual Feeder Margin Tray Behaviour Auto Tray Switch Auto Continue Paper Substitution Tray Protection Address Book PhoneBook Setup
(see "System setup" on page 233) Email Print Reset Reports Configuration Supplies Information Demo Page Help List Address Book Fax Send Confirmation Fax Sent Email Sent Fax Received Fax Schedule Jobs Network Configuration PCL Font List PS Font List Usage Counter Account Fax Setup Send Forward Receive Forward Toll Save Secure Receive Prefix Dial Stmp Rcvd Name ECM Mode Modem Speed Image TCR Setup Wizard Network Setup Ethernet Speed TCP/IP (IPv4) TCP/IP (IPv6) 802.1x Ethernet Activate Http Activate WINS SNMP V1/V2 SNTP UPnP(SSDP) MDNS SetIP SLP Wireless Wi-Fi ON/OFF Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct On/
Off Device Name IP Address Group Owner Network Key Status WPS Settings Connect via PBC Connect via PIN WLAN Settings WLAN Defaults WLAN Signal Clear Settings Print Setup Orientation Copies Resolution Clear Text Edge Enhance Trapping Screen Emulation Select Tray 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 35 Menu overview a. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type. b. This is an optional feature. Setup
(see "System setup" on page 233) Initial Setup Machine ID Select Country Language Date&Time Clock Mode Default Mode Sound/Volume Power Save Wakeup Event System Timeout Import Setting Export Setting Toner Status Alert Skip Blank Pages Job Timeout Altitude Adjustment Auto CR Firmware Version PDF Type ImageOverwrite Default Paper Size CLR Empty Msga Image Management Vapor Mode Paper Stacking Humidity a. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. Document Box
(see "System setup" on page 233) System Boxes Stored Print Secured Print Shared Folder Duplex Select Tray Copies Color Mode Admin Setup User Access Control Authentication Stamp Item Opacity Position Change Admin. Password Firmware Upgrade Troubleshooting Language 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 36 You can set the machines settings by using the Device Settings in
program. For Windows and Mac users, see "Device Settings" on page 307. 1 Select panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Initial Setup on the touch screen. Machines basic settings
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, Manager see "Device Settings" on page 307. 2 After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default settings. To change the machines default settings, follow these steps:
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Select the option you want, then press OK. Language: change the language that is displayed on the control panel. Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay fax and delay print. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to change it for the correct time being. Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see
"Keypad letters and numbers" on page 253). Month = 01 to 12 Day = 01 to 31 Year = requires four digits Hour = 01 to 12 Minute = 00 to 59 Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format. Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save power. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 37 Machines basic settings 3 4 5 When you press the received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode.
(Power/Wake Up) button, start printing, or a fax is Altitude Adjustment: Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are(see "Altitude adjustment" on page 250). Select the option you want, then press OK. Press OK to save the selection. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine. See "Entering various characters" on page 253. See "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 253. See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 48. See "Setting up the fax address book" on page 254. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 38 Media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine. 2 Tray overview Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsungs warranty or service agreements. Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. Using inflammable print media can cause a fire. Use designated print media(see "Print media specifications" on page 131). The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause a fire. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides. 2 1 3 1 Tray extend lever 2 Paper length guide 3 Paper width guide 4 Paper width guides on a manual feeder 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 39 Media and tray For Legal-sized paper Push button as shown and pull out the tray. 1 2 LGL Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Tray overview" on page 39). If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew, or jamming of the paper. Loading paper in the tray Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). 3 Tray 1 / optional tray 1 Pull out the paper tray. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 40 Media and tray 2 Squeeze and the paper width guide and paper length lever to locate them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray to adjust to the size (see "Tray overview" on page 39) 4 After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and paper length guide. 3 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. 2 1 1 Paper length guide 2 Paper width guide 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 41 Media and tray Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp. If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams. 5 Insert the tray back into the machine. Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or the paper can be wrinkled. 6 When you print a document, set the paper type and size for tray (see
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 48). Multi-purpose (or Manual feeder) tray The multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media specifications" on page 131). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 42 Media and tray Tips on using the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray. To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. This also applies to other types of print media. Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems (see "Print media specifications" on page 131). Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. 1 Pull out the paper tray for manual feeding. OR Press the push-release of multi-purpose tray and it down to open. 2 Load the paper. 3 Squeeze the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much, or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew. When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline
(See "Printing on special media" on page 44). When papers overlap when printing using Multi-purpose tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 43 Media and tray 4 When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multi-
purpose (or manual feeder) tray. To see paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on page 131. For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel (see "Setting the paper size and type" on page 48). 4 Printing on special media The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a paper mismatch error. To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer Managerselect
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings. Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from the control panel. Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type(see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time
(see "Print media specifications" on page 131). Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see
"Front view" on page 21). Types Tray 1 Optional tray Manual feeder/ Multi-
purpose tray Plain Thick Thicker Thin Bond Color CardStock Labels Transparency Envelope Preprinted Cotton Recycled Archive Letterhead Punched 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 44 Media and tray Types Tray 1 Optional tray Manual feeder/ Multi-
purpose tray Glossy Photo
(: Supported, Blank: Not supported) Envelope Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure. When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
- Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise; jams may occur.
-
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air. Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged. Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine during operation.
-
-
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds. Do not use stamped envelopes. Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials. Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machines fusing temperature for 0.1 second about 170C (338 F). The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser. For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelopes seams meet. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 45 Media and tray Transparency In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector. To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet. To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are being printed out. Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox, such as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter). Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser printers. Must withstand the machines fusing temperature. Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully. To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-
-
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machines fusing temperature about 170C (338F). Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 46 Media and tray
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. Preprinted paper Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components. Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine. Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/ Custom-sized paper In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed. Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machines fusing temperature for 0.1 second (about 170C (338F)). Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 47 Media and tray Glossy Photo Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only. Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A). 5 Setting the paper size and type After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the control panel buttons. The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a paper mismatch error. To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer Managerselect
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings. Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from the control panel. Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). You can set the paper size and type from Device Settings in
program.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, Manager see "Device Settings" on page 307. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 1 Select Paper Type on the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Paper Setup > select a tray >
Paper Size or Paper Type on the touch screen. 2 3 4 Select the tray and the option you want. Press OK to save the selection. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the Paper tab > Size > Edit... and set CustomPaper Size Settings in the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 48 Media and tray Using the output support The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it. 7 Preparing originals Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper jam, low print quality and machine damage. 6 The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. Unfold the output support. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper Coated paper
- Onion skin or thin paper
- Wrinkled or creased paper
-
-
Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Remove all staples and paper clips before loading. Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading. Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper. Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other unusual characteristics. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 49 1 Lift and open the scanner lid. Media and tray 8 Loading originals You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). On the scanner glass Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images.Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 50 Media and tray 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass. 3 Close the scanner lid. Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption. Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always keep it clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner lid open. Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt. Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt. Do not look into the light from inside of the scanner while copying or scanning. It is harmful to eyes. In the document feeder Using the document feeder (or duplex automatic document feeder (DADF)), you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m2, 21 lbs bond) for one job. 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 51 Media and tray 2 Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray. Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always keep the glass clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). 3 Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 52 Basic printing For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using advanced print features" on page 260). 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list. Printing If you are a MacLinux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Mac printing" on page 269, "Linux printing" on page 271 or "Unix printing" on page 272). 9 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7. 1 Open the document you want to print. 2 Select Print from the File menu. 4 5 The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window. To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 53 Basic printing 10 Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows:
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button on the control panel. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 54 Basic printing Opening printing preferences The Printing Preferences window that appears in this users guide may differ depending on the machine in use. When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a or warning mark option but it is not recommended, and an select that option due to the machines setting or environment. mark means you can select that certain mark means you cannot
. An 11 Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears. 1 Open the document you want to print. 2 3 4 Click Properties or Preferences. Select your machine from the Select Printer. The screenshot may differ depending on model. You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
"Easy Eco Driver" on page 299). You can check the machines current status pressing the Printer Status button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 308). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 55 Basic printing Using a favorite setting The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the Favorites and Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use. To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
1 Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box. To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected. To delete saved settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete. 12 Using help Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and press F1 on your keyboard. 3 Click Save. 4 5 Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved. Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 56 Basic printing 13 Eco printing 1 Select the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing. If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is enabled. The default setting of Eco mode is duplex, Multiple Pages per Side (2-up), Skip Blank Pages. You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in
program. For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
"Device Settings" on page 307.
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, see Or press Eco on the control panel. Or select Eco > Settings > Next on the touch screen. 2 Select the option you want and press OK. Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode.
- Off: Set the eco mode off.
- On: Set the eco mode on. If you set the eco mode on with a passcode from the SyncThru Web Service
(Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or
(Device Settings > Eco), the On force message appears. You have to enter the passcode to change the eco mode status. Setting Eco mode on the control panel Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30 or "Control panel overview" on page 23). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru Web Service or . Before you select this item, you must set the eco function in SyncThru Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or
(Device Settings > Eco).
-
Select Template Default Eco: The machine is set to Default Eco mode. Custom Eco: Change any necessary values. 3 Press OK to save the selection. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 57 Basic printing Setting eco mode on the driver To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (
means the eco mode is currently enabled.
), that Eco options Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel. None: Disables Eco mode. Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to use. Passcode: If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode, you have to enter the passcode to change the status. Passcode button: You can set from SyncThru Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or
(Device Settings > Eco), the passcode button is activated. To change the print settings, click on this button, enter the passcode or need to contact the administrator. Result simulator Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you selected. The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled. Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA, the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index. The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing power consumption of this machine. The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may differ depending on the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connection method, media type [thickness], media size, job complexity, etc. Secure printing Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. You might not be able to print a complex document using the RAM Disk. Install an optional memory to print a complex document. 14 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 58 Basic printing When you use a printing device in an office, school or other public place, you can protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the secure printing feature. Starting secure printing from the SyncThru Web Service 1 Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 Click Login on the upper right of SyncThru Web Service website (see
"Logging into SyncThru Web Service" on page 300). Settings > Machine Settings > System > RAM Disk. Enable RAM Disk. This features may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. 3 4 Printing secure documents from the control panel Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on page 30 or "Control panel overview" on page 23).
(Menu) > Job Management > Secured Job on the control 1 Select panel. OR For the model with a touch screen, select Boxes > Next > Secured Print on the touch screen.
(Document Box) > System 2 3 4 Select the document to print. Enter the password that you set from the printer driver. Print or delete the document. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 59 Basic copying For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Copy" on page 218). Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30 or "Control panel overview" on page 23). 16 15 If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press or Stop/Clear) button and the copying will stop.
(Stop Changing the settings for each copy Basic copy 1 Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel. Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and easily make a copy. Or select
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel. Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
(settings) on the touch screen. Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge, Darkness, Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons
(see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 60).
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button twice while setting the If you press the copy options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if necessary. Darkness Press
(Start). If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 60 2 3 4 5 Basic copying 1 Select control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the 1 Select control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the Or press Darkness on the control panel. Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
screen.
(settings) >Darkness on the touch 2 3 Select the option you want and press OK. For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the darkest. 2
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. Or select panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the control Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
touch screen.
(settings) > Original Type on the Select the option you want and press OK. Text: Use for originals containing mostly text. Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs. Original Type The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document for the current copy job. If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts. Photo: Use when the originals are photographs. Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines. 3 Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Reduced or enlarged copy You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% from the document feeder or scanner glass. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 61 Basic copying This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 8). If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not available. To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Select
(copy) >
the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on Or select panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on the control Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
the touch screen.
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge on 2 3 Select the option you want and press OK. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate 1 Select Custom on the control panel.
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >
Or select the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge> Custom on Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
Custom on the touch screen.
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge >
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad. Press OK to save the selection. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy. 2 3 4 17 ID card copying Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 62 Basic copying The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature. If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ. 1 Press ID Copy on the control panel. Or select panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Layout > ID Copy on the control Or select Copy > ID Copy on the touch screen. 2 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid. 3 Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display. 4
(Start). Press Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side and Press [Start]. 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid. 6 Press
(Start) button. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 63 Basic copying
(Start) button, only the front side will be If you do not press the copied. If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 64 Basic scanning For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan features" on page 274). 18 Basic Scanning This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals. This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine. Accessing menus may differ from model to model. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. If you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page 275). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 2 Select
(scan) > Scan To PC on the control panel. Or select Scan > Local PC on the touch screen. 3 4 5 If you see Not Available message, check the port connectionor select Enable Scan from Device Panel in Switch to advanced modeScan to Settings. Select the scan destination you want and press OK. Default setting is My Documents. You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list. Also you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different path. To change the Switch to advanced modeScan to Settings. Select the option you want and press OK. Scanning begins. Scanned image is saved in computers C:\Users\users name\My Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 65 Basic faxing For special faxing features, see "Fax features" on page 282. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30 or "Control panel overview" on page 23). You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more information ask your internet service provider. We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-
filter. 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem / Telephone line
(see "Rear view" on page 22). 19 Preparing to fax Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to your telephone wall jack (see "Rear view" on page 22). Refer to the Quick Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a telephone connection is different from one country to another. 20 Sending a fax When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 2 Select
(fax) on the control panel. Or select Fax > Memory Send >
(settings) on the touch screen. 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 68). 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 66 Basic faxing 4 5 Enter the destination fax number (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 253). 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 68). Press send the fax to the destinations.
(Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung Network PC Fax (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 283). When you want to cancel a fax job, press
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button before the machine starts transmission. If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to place another page. 4 5 6 Press
(On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. Press signal from the remote fax machine.
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax Sending a fax to multiple destinations You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory. Sending a fax manually Perform the following to send a fax using panel.
(On Hook Dial) on the control You cannot send faxes with this feature if you have chosen super fine as an option or if the fax is in color. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 2 Select
(fax) on the control panel. 2 Select
(fax) on the control panel. Or select Fax > On Hook Dial >
(settings) on the touch screen. Or select Fax > SpeedDial Send or Group Dial Send >
the touch screen.
(settings) on 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 67 Basic faxing 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 68). 21 Receiving a fax Select
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel. Or select Next on the touch screen. Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK. Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax. You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using 22 the
(Address book) button. Adjusting the document settings Enter the second fax number and press OK. The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document. Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your originals status to get the best quality. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 5 and 6. You can add up to 10 destinations. Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group dial number. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30 or "Control panel overview" on page 23). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 4 5 6 7 8 When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK. The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the order in which you entered them. Multi send report is printed after sending faxes. Resolution The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-
based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 68 Basic faxing The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default setting (see Advanced Guide). 1 Select panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control Color Fax: Original with colors. Memory transmission is not available in this mode. You can only send a color fax if the machine you are communicating with supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually. Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial, Delayed Send, or etc. >
(settings) > Resolution on the touch screen. 3 Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready 2 Select the option you want and press OK. Standard: Originals with normal sized characters. Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot-matrix printer. Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution. For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine. When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine. Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs. Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document. The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default setting (see "Fax" on page 224). 1 Select panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial, Delayed Send, or etc. >
(settings) > Darkness on the touch screen. 2 3 Select a darkness level you want. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 69 Using USB memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine. You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector. 23 About USB memory A B USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move. You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device. Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device Print data stored on a USB memory device Restore backup files to the machines memory Format the USB memory device Check the available memory space 24 Plugging in a USB memory device The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes. Check your USB memory devices file system from your dealer. Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device. Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it. Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by users misuse. If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see the users guide of the USB memory device. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 70 Using USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Scanning 25 Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30 or "Control panel overview" on page 23). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device. 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 3 Select
(scan) > Scan To USB > OK on the control panel. Or select Scan > USB > Next > Start on the touch screen. The machine begins scanning. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the machine. Customizing Scan to USB You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB job. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 71 Using USB memory device 1 Select control panel.
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the Or select Scan to >
control panel.
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the Or select Direct USB > Scan to USB >
(settings) on the touch screen. 2 Select the setting option you want appears. Original Size: Sets the image size. Original Type: Sets the original documents. 3 4 5 Select the desired status you want and press OK. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready You can change the default scan settings. Refer to the Advanced Guide. 26 Printing from a USB memory device Resolution: Sets the image resolution. You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option, you cannot select JPEG in File Format. File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in Color Mode. Duplex: Sets the duplex mode. Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original. File Name: Sets the file name. File Policy: Sets the policy to save files between overwirting or renaming PDF Encryption: Sets the encrypts PDF files. File is supported by Direct Print option. PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible. If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be different. TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline JPEG: JPEG Baseline PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 72 2 3 4 5 6 7 Using USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device 27 Backing up data 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. Select USB Print. Data in the machines memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device. Select the folder or file you want and press OK. If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder. Backing up data Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number. Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file. After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job. Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2. Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine. 2 3 4 Select on the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Export Setting Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Export Setting on the touch screen. Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK. The data is backed up to the USB memory.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 73 2 3 4 5 6 Using USB memory device Restoring data 1 Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port. Select on the control panel.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Import Setting Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Import Setting on the touch screen. If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder. After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it. Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK. Select the file you want to restore and press OK. Deleting an image file Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. 28 Managing USB memory You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device. For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a file >
(settings) > Delete on the touch screen. 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. 2 3 4 5 Select File Manage > Delete and press OK. Select the file you want to delete and press OK. Select Yes.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 74 Using USB memory device Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. 2 3 4 Select Check Space. The available memory space appears on the display.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a file >
(settings) > Format on the touch screen. 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine, and then press Direct USB. 2 3 4 Select File Manage > Format and press OK. Select Yes.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. Viewing the USB memory status You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents. For touch screen model, select Direct USB > Show Space > Next on the touch screen. 2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup 75 3. Maintenance This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine. Ordering supplies and accessories Available consumables Available accessories Available maintenance parts Storing the toner cartridge Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the waste toner container Monitoring the supplies life Setting the toner low alert Cleaning the machine Tips for moving & storing your machine Installing accessories 77 78 80 81 82 84 86 89 91 95 96 97 103 Ordering supplies and accessories Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts. To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service. 3. Maintenance 77 Available consumables When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:
Type Toner cartridge Average yielda Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 6,000 standard pages (Black) Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan) Waste toner container Approx. 14,000 standard pages (Black) Approx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan) Part name CLT-K505L: Black CLT-Y505L: Yellow CLT-M505L: Magenta CLT-C505L: Cyan CLT-W506 a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size. Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used, the toner cartridges lifespan may differ. When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific country conditions. 3. Maintenance 78 Available consumables Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machines warranty. 3. Maintenance 79 Available accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machines performance and capacity. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 6). Accessory Function Part name Memory module Extends your machines memory capacity. ML-MEM380 (1,024 MB) Optional tray If you are experiencing frequent paper supply problems, you can attach an additional 520a sheet tray. CLP-S680A IEEE 1284 Portb Allows you to use various interface. ML-PAR100 When installing the printer driver with an IEEE1284B parallel connector, the machine might not be found and after installing the printer driver, only basic printing features are available. If you want to check the machine's status or set the settings, connect the machine to a computer with a USB cable or a network. If you use the IEEE 1284B parallel connector, you can not use the USB cable. a. Plain paper 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond). b. The optional IEEE 1284 port can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port. 3. Maintenance 80
1 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.41 MiB |
Available maintenance parts You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems resulting from the worn-out parts. Maintenance parts are mostly rollers, belts and pads. However, the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the model. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. To purchase maintenance parts, contact the retailer where you bought the machine. The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the Samsung Printer Status program. Or if your machine supports display screen, a message is displayed in the display screen. The replacement period varies based on the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, paper type, paper size, and job complexity. 3. Maintenance 81 Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge. Store the cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used. This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge properly. Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package. Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it were installed in the machine. Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Temperature greater than 40C (104F). Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%. An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. Direct sunlight or room light. Dusty places. A car for a long period of time. An environment where corrosive gases are present.
-
An environment with salty air. Handling instructions Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge. Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. 1 2 Toner cartridge usage Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Samsungs printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner cartridges. 3. Maintenance 82 Storing the toner cartridge 3 Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often. 3. Maintenance 83 Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density varies from side to side. The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display. The computers Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 308). If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 3. Maintenance 84 Redistributing toner 3. Maintenance 85 Replacing the toner cartridge Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K). The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate when each individual toner cartridge should be replaced. The computers Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is empty on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 308). Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 78). Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 3. Maintenance 86 Replacing the toner cartridge 3. Maintenance 87 Replacing the toner cartridge 3. Maintenance 88 Replacing the waste toner container When the life span of the waste toner container has expired, waste toner container-related message appears on the screen display of the control panel, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Check the waste toner container for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 78). Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur. When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands. Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill. Do not tilt or turn over the container. 3. Maintenance 89 Replacing the waste toner container 1 2 1 2 2 1 3. Maintenance 90 Installing accessories 4 Precautions 5 Setting Device Options Disconnect the power cord Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on. To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories. When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices in Device Options. Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again. When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to the instructions. 1 Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Settings. 2 3 4 For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. For Windows 8, search for Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your machine. For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7, For Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. 3. Maintenance 91 Installing accessories 5 6 If Printer properties item has mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. Select Device Options. The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using. Select the appropriate option. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine. Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select the tray. Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode. Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job. Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF Spooling. Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account identification information with each document you print.
- User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job.
- Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job. If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting Password Encryption. Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size. 7 Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window. 3. Maintenance 92 Installing accessories 6 Upgrading a memory module Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory module slot to install additional memory. We recommend the use of only genuine Samsung DIMM's. You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM's. The order information is provided for optional accessories (see "Available accessories" on page 80). After installing the optional memory, you can use the advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer properties window. You can control the active job queue and file policy in Job Manage. menu (see "Using optional device features" on page 292). 1 2 2 1 3. Maintenance 93 Installing accessories 2 1 2 1 3. Maintenance 94 Monitoring the supplies life If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if necessary. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 1 Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Report > Supplies Information on the touch screen. 2 3 Select the option you want and press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready mode. 3. Maintenance 95 Setting the toner low alert If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not this message or LED appears. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on page 30). You can set the machines settings by using the Device Settings in program. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, see "Device Settings" on page 307. 1 Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > TonerLow Alert on the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Toner Status Alert on the touch screen. On the touch screen model, you can set the toner's Warning Level for the toner low error in the Toner Status Alert option. Warning Level means the remaining amount of toner (%) in the toner cartridge. 2 3 Select the option you want. Press OK to save the selection. 3. Maintenance 96 Cleaning the machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing condition and use your machine longer. Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you. 7 Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. 3. Maintenance 97 Cleaning the machine 8 Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems. To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine. Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). 3. Maintenance 98 Cleaning the machine 3. Maintenance 99 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the pickup roller Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). 9 3. Maintenance 100 Cleaning the machine 10 Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). 1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water. 2 Lift and open the scanner lid. 3. Maintenance 101 Cleaning the machine 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry. 4 3 1 2 1 Scanner lid 2 Scanner glass 3 Document feeder glass 4 White bar 4 Close the scanner lid. 3. Maintenance 102 Tips for moving & storing your machine When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality. When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely. 3. Maintenance 103 4. Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing original document jams Clearing paper jams Understanding the status LED Understanding display messages 105 106 111 120 122 This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error. If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the Advanced Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 316). If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service. Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct medias, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 39). Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper. Do not mix paper type and size in a tray. Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 131). 4. Troubleshooting 105
1 | Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.83 MiB |
Clearing original document jams When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display. To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully. To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals. 4. Troubleshooting 106 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in front of scanner Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 8). 1 4. Troubleshooting 107 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam inside of scanner Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 8). 2 4. Troubleshooting 108 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in exit area of scanner Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 21). 3 1 Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder. 2 Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder. 4. Troubleshooting 109 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in scanner duplex path Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 21). 4 2 1 4. Troubleshooting 110 Clearing paper jams To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. In tray1 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). 5 4. Troubleshooting 111 Clearing paper jams 6 In optional tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 4. Troubleshooting 112 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting 113 Clearing paper jams 7 In the manual feeder/multi-purpose tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 4. Troubleshooting 114 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
1 2 3 4. Troubleshooting 115 Clearing paper jams Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. Illustrations on this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21). 8 4. Troubleshooting 116 Clearing paper jams In the exit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 9 4. Troubleshooting 117 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting 118 Clearing paper jams 10 In the duplex unit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 4. Troubleshooting 119 Understanding the status LED The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 23). To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Understanding display messages" on page 122). You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers Samsung Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 308). If the problem persists, call a service representative. LED Status Off The machine is off-line. Description Green Blinking When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data. On The machine is on-line and can be used. Status Red A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. Blinking Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge lifea of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 84).b A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). On The cover is opened. Close the cover. There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on page 122). A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 111). 4. Troubleshooting 120 Understanding the status LED LED Status Description Blinking The machine is connecting to a wireless network. Wirelessb Blue
(
) Power/
WakeUp Blue Eco Green On Off On Off On Off The machine is connected to a wireless network(see "Wireless network setup" on page 177). The machine is disconnected from a wireless network. The machine is in power save mode. The machine is in ready mode or machines power is off. Eco mode is on (see "Eco printing" on page 57). Eco mode is off. a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing. b. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 23). 4. Troubleshooting 121 Understanding display messages Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machines status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary. 11 Paper Jam-related messages You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers Printing Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 308). If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job again. If the problem persists, call a service representative. When you call for service, provide the service representative with the contents of display message. Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the options or models.
[error number] indicates the error number.
[tray type] indicates the tray number.
[media type] indicates the media type.
[media size] indicates the media size.
[color] indicates the color of toner.
[unit type] indicates the unit type. Message Meaning Suggested solutions Original paper jam inside of scanner. Remove jam Original paper jam in front of scanner. Remove jam Paper Jam in Tray1 Paper Jam in Tray2 Paper Jam in MP Tray The loaded original document has jammed in document feeder. Clear the jam (see "Clearing original document jams" on page 106). Paper has jammed in the tray. Clear the jam (see "In tray1" on page 111). Paper has jammed in the optional tray. Clear the jam (see "In optional tray" on page 112). Paper has jammed in the multi-purpose tray. Clear the jam (see "In the manual feeder/multi-purpose tray" on page 114). Jam inside machine Paper has jammed iinside the machine. Clear the jam (see "Inside the machine" on page 116). Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed inside the duplex area. Clear the jam (see "In the duplex unit area" on page 119). Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in the paper exit area. Clear the jam (see "In the exit area" on page 117). 4. Troubleshooting 122 Understanding display messages 12 Toner-related messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions A toner cartridge is not installed. A toner cartridge is not being detected Reinstall the toner cartridge. Reinstall the toner cartridge two or three times to confirm it is seated properly. If the problem persists, contact the service representatives. Protective film is not removed from toner. Remove the protective film from the toner cartridge. Refer to Quick Installation Guide provided with your machine. The indicated toner cartridge is not suitable for your machine. Install the corresponding toner cartridge with a Samsung-genuine cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). Error [error number]
Toner Failure:
[error number]
[color]
Install [color]
toner again
[color] toner not installed Install [color]
toner cartridge
[color]toner Not compatible
[color] toner cartridge is not compatible. Check guide Message Meaning Suggested solutions Prepare new
[color] toner Prepare new
[color] toner cartridge Replace new
toner Replace with new [color]
toner cartridge Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. The indicated toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. The indicated toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge lifea. Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see
"Redistributing toner" on page 84). You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel. If you select Stop, the printer stops printing. If you select Continue, the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed. Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears. Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). Replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). 4. Troubleshooting 123 Understanding display messages a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798 (see "Available consumables" on page 78). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media, percentage of image area, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears and the machine stops printing. Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. 13 Tray-related messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Output bin full Output bin full. Remove printed paper The output tray is full. Remove papers from the output tray, the printer resumes printing. Message Meaning Suggested solutions Paper jam or empty in tray Paper has jammed in the paper feed area. There is no paper in tray. Paper Empty in tray 1 Paper is empty in tray 1. There is no paper in tray 1. Load paper Paper Empty in tray 2 Paper is empty in tray 2. There is no paper in tray 2. Load paper Paper Empty in MP Paper is empty in MP tray. Load paper There is no paper in the multi-purpose tray. Clear the jam (see
"Clearing paper jams" on page 111
). Load paper in tray
(see "Multi-purpose
(or Manual feeder) tray" on page 42). Load paper in tray 1 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 40). Load paper in tray 2 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 40). Load paper in the multi-
purpose tray (see "Multi-
purpose (or Manual feeder) tray" on page 42). 4. Troubleshooting 124 Understanding display messages Network-related messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions IP Conflict This IP address conflicts with that of other system 802.1x Network Error 802.1x Network Error Contact the Admin. The network IP address you have set is being used by someone else. Fail to authenticate. Check the IP address and reset it if necessary (see Advanced Guide). Check the network authentication protocol. If the problem persists, contact your network administrator. 14 15 Misc. messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Adjusting Color Registration... Calibrating image density The machine is adjusting the color registration. Wait a few minutes. The machine is calibrating the image density. Wait a few minutes. Message Meaning Suggested solutions Door is open. Close it Scanner door open Door of scanner is open. Close the door Error: [error number]
Actuator [unit type]
Failure: [error number]
Call for service Error: [error number]
[unit type] Failure: [error number] Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists. Error: [error number]
[unit type] Unit Failure:
[error number] Please turn off then on Not Proper room temp Not Proper room temperature. Change room temperature The front cover or rear cover is not securely latched. The document feeder cover is not securely latched. Close the cover until it locks into place. Close the cover until it locks into place. The machine unit cannot be controlled. Reboot the power and try the printing job again. If the problem persists, please call for service. The machine is in a room with improper room temperature. Move the machine to a room with proper room temperature (see
"Specifications" on page 129). 4. Troubleshooting 125 Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Message Meaning Suggested solutions Prepare TR. belt Prepare new image transfer belt unit The life of the transfer belt has expired. Replace Fuser uint Replace with new fuser uint The life of the fuser unit will be expired. Install TR. belt unit Install image transfer belt unit The transfer belt is not installed. TR. belt Not compatible Image transfer belt unit is not compatible. Check guide The transfer belt of the machine is not for your machine. Waste toner Full Waste toner container is almost full. Replace with new one The life span of the waste toner container has expired and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner container is placed into the printer. Replace the transfer belt with a new one. Contact the service representatives. Replace the fuser unit with a new one. Contact the service representatives. Install a Samsung-
genuine transfer belt. Contact the service representatives. Install the a Samsung-
genuine part designed for your machine. Contact the service representatives. Replace a waste toner container with a Samsung-genuine waste toner container. Waste Not Installed Waste toner tank is not installed. install it The waste toner container is not installed. Replace pickup roller Replace with new [tray type] pickup roller The life of the tray1, tray2 or MP tray pick-up roller will expired soon. Replace retard roller End of life, Replace with new [tray type] retard roller The life of the tray1 or tray2 retard roller has expired. Memory Full Fax memory is full. Print or remove received fax job The memory is full No more fax data can be received. Scanner Locked The scanner is locked. Scanner locking switch is locked. Pull Blue Latch towards you. Install the waste toner container. If it is already installed, try to reinstall the waste toner container. If the problem persists, call for service. Replace the tray pick-
up roller with a new one. Contact the service representatives. Replace the tray retard roller with a new one. Contact the service representatives. Print or remove the received fax data in the memory. Reboot the power. If the problem persists, please call for service. 4. Troubleshooting 126 Understanding display messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Error: [error number]
Fax System Failure:
[error number] Install fax modem card again Error: [error number]
UI System Failure:
[error number] Call for service Error: [error number]
EngineSystem Failure:
[error number] Call for service There is a problem in the fax system. There is a problem in the UI system. There is a problem in the engine system. Install the fax card. If it is already installed, try to reinstall the fax card. If the problem persists, call for service. Unplug the power cord and plug it back in. If the problem persists, call for service. Unplug the power cord and plug it back in. If the problem persists, call for service. 4. Troubleshooting 127 5. Appendix This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations. Specifications Regulatory information Copyright 129 141 154 Specifications General specifications The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information. 1 Dimensiona Weighta Noise Levelbc Description Items Width x Length x Height Machine with consumables Ready mode Print mode Copy mode Scanner glass 469 x 452.5 x 504.3 mm (18.46 x 17.81 x 19.85 inches) 26.7 Kg (58.86 Ibs) Less than 32 dB (A) Less than 52 dB (A) Less than 54 dB (A) Document feeder Less than 54 dB (A) Scanner glass Less than 54 dB (A) Document feeder Less than 54 dB (A) Scan mode Temperature Humidity Power ratingd Operation Storage (packed) Operation Storage (packed) 110 volt models 220 volt models Power consumption Average operating mode Ready mode Power save modee Power off modef 10 to 30 C (50 to 86 F)
-20 to 40 C (-4 to 104 F) 20 to 80% RH 10 to 90% RH AC 110 - 127 V AC 220 - 240 V Less than 450 W Less than 18 W Less than 2.4 W Less than 0.1 W 5. Appendix 129 Specifications Wirelessg Items Module SPW-B43143U Description a. Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset. b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. c. China only: If the equipment's noise is louder than 63 db (A) ,the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice. d. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine. e. The power consumption of power save mode may be affected by machines status, setting conditions, operating environment. f. Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected. g. Wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 6). 5. Appendix 130 Specifications Print media specifications 2 Type Size Dimensions Weight/Capacitya C267x series Multi-purpose tray 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 50 sheets Plain paper bc 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches) 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches) 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches) 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches) 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches) 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) Letter Legal US Folio A4 Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive Statement A5 A6 Tray1/ Optional tray 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) Tray1: 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 (21 lbs bond) Optional tray: 520 sheets of 80 g/m2
(20 lbs bond) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond) Not available in optional tray. 5. Appendix 131 Specifications Type Size Dimensions Envelope 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches) 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches) Envelope Monarch Envelope No. 10 Envelope No. 9 Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches) 98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches) Weight/Capacitya C267x series Tray1/ Optional tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 20 sheets Not available in optional tray. Multi-purpose tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 5 sheets Thick paperbc Thicker paperbc Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) 50 sheets of 105 g/m2
(28 lbs bond) 91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) 10 sheets 164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to 59 lbs bond) 50 sheets of 220 g/m2 164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to 59 lbs bond) 10 sheets) Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section
(59 lbs bond) Not available in optional tray. 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) 250sheets of 70 g/m2
(19 lbs bond) 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) 50 sheets 5. Appendix 132 Specifications Type Size Dimensions Cotton, Color, Pre-printed Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Recycled Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Transparency Letter, Legal, A4 Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Labels d Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 Weight/Capacitya C267x series Tray1/ Optional tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond) Not available in optional tray. 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond) 138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to 39 lbs bond) 50 sheets Not available in optional tray. 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) 50 sheets Not available in optional tray. Multi-purpose tray 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) 50 sheets 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) 50 sheets 138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to 39 lbs bond) 10 sheets 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) 10 sheets 5. Appendix 133 Specifications Type Size Dimensions Refer to the Plain paper section Card stock bc Bond paper Archive, Punched paper, Letterhead Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Weight/Capacitya C267x series Tray1/ Optional tray 121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs bond) 50 sheets Multi-purpose tray 121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43 lbs bond) 10 sheets Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) 50 sheets 250 sheets 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) 10 sheets 50 sheets 5. Appendix 134 Specifications Type Size Dimensions Glossy Photo b Letter, A4, Postcard 4x6 Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Minimum size (custom) Tray1: 98 x 127 mm (3.86 x 5 inches) Optional tray: 148.5 x 210 mm
(5.85 x 8.27inches) Multi-Purpose tray/ Manual Feeder: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) Maximum size (custom) Weight/Capacitya C267x series Multi-purpose tray 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35 lbs bond) 5 sheets 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47 lbs bond) 5 sheets 176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59 lbs bond) 5 sheets 60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to 59 lbs bond) Tray1/ Optional tray 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35 lbs bond) for tray1 Tray1: 30 sheets Optional tray: 50 sheets 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47 lbs bond) Tray1: 30 sheets Optional tray: 50 sheets 176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59 lbs bond) Tray1: 30 sheets Optional tray: 50 sheets 60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to 59 lbs bond) for tray1 60 to 163 g/m2 ( 16 to 43 lbs bond) for optional tray. a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions. b. Post card 4 x 6 is supported for tray1Manual feeder, or Multi-purpose tray. 5. Appendix 135 Specifications Index card (3x5) is supported for Manual feeder and Multi-purpose tray. c. d. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness. 5. Appendix 136 Specifications 3 System requirements Microsoft Windows Operating system Requirement (recommended) CPU Windows XP Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) Windows Server 2003 Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) Windows Server 2008 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) Windows Vista Windows 7 Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). DVD-R/W Drive Windows Server 2008 R2 Intel Pentium IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). DVD-R/W Drive Windows 8 Windows 8.1 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 RAM free HDD space 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB 512 MB (2 GB) 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB (2 GB) 512 MB (2 GB) 2 GB (2 GB) 10 GB 15 GB 16 GB 10 GB 20 GB Intel Pentium IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB) 32GB 5. Appendix 137 Specifications Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. Users who have administrator rights can install the software. Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine. Mac Operating system Mac OS X 10.5 Intel processors 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5 Mac OS X 10.6 Mac OS X 10.7-10.9 Intel processors Intel processors Requirements (Recommended) CPU RAM Free HDD space 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB (2 GB) 2 GB 1 GB 1 GB 4 GB 5. Appendix 138 Specifications Linux Items Requirements Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6 Fedora 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 OpenSUSE 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3 Ubuntu 10.04, 10.10, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04, 12.10, 13.04 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 Debian 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 7.1 Mint 13, 14, 15 Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core2) 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB (2 GB) Operating system CPU RAM Free HDD space Unix Items Operating system Requirements Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC) HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium) IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 7.1 (PowerPC) Free HDD space Up to 100 MB 5. Appendix 139 Specifications Network environment Network and wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 6). 4 You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine. Items Network interface Network operating system Network protocols Wireless security Specifications Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS X 10.5 -10.9 UNIX OS TCP/IPv4 DHCP, BOOTP DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec) Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK) Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES 5. Appendix 140 Regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements. When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
5 Laser safety statement The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-
1 : 2007. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition. Warning Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. 6 Ozone safety This products ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good ventilation. 5. Appendix 141 Regulatory information Mercury Safety Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only) 7 8 Power saver 9 10 This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use. When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified. Recycling Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner. China only 5. Appendix 142 Regulatory information Website: http://www.samsung.com/cn/support/location/
supportServiceLocation.do?page=SERVICE.LOCATION 11 Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
(Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. 5. Appendix 143 Regulatory information
(The United States of America only) Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 14 Radio frequency emissions FCC information to the user State of California Proposition 65 Warning (US Only) 12 13 Taiwan only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 5. Appendix 144 Regulatory information Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help. 15 Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) United States of America Canadian radio interference regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada. Cet appareil numrique respecte les limites de bruits radiolectriques applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matriel brouilleur: Appareils Numriques, ICES-003 dicte par lIndustrie et Sciences Canada. Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 5. Appendix 145 Regulatory information Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna. 16 Germany only Turkey only 17 18 19 Russia only Thailand only This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement. 20 Canada only This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables dIndustrie Canada. 5. Appendix 146 Regulatory information The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / Lindice dequivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme dindices dequivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcede pas cinq. The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service 21 22 Fax Branding Ringer Equivalence Number The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information:
1 2 the date and time of transmission identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual. 3 The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. 5. Appendix 147 Regulatory information The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores. FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that they:
a promptly notify the customer. b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem. c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68. When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number. This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines. This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids. You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C. 23 Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only) You should also know that:
Important Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system. If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your machine. The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover. Contact the people from you purchased the machine. 5. Appendix 148 Regulatory information The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug. You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red. You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board. If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away. You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket. 24 Declaration of conformity (European countries) Approvals and Certifications Important warning:
You must earth this machine. The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
Green and Yellow: Earth Blue: Neutral Brown: Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xN/CLX-
626xND] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC). Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [C267xFW] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC. You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green. January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment. You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black. January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility. 5. Appendix 149 Regulatory information March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative. EC Certification Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX) This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance. The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document. European radio approval information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices) Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries European states with restrictions on use:
EU In France, this equipment may only be used indoors. EEA/EFTA countries 5. Appendix 150
1 | Users Manual 4 | Users Manual | 3.75 MiB |
Regulatory information No limitations at this time Israel only 25 26 Regulatory compliance statements Wireless guidance Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. 5. Appendix 151 Regulatory information In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information. 5. Appendix 152 Regulatory information 27 China only 5. Appendix 153 Copyright 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This users guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this users guide. Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Google, Picasa, Google Cloud Print, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc. iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc. All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 1.00 5. Appendix 154 Users Guide Users Guide C267x series ADVANCED ADVANCED This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments. Some features may not be available depending on models or countries. BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting on Windows. 1. Software Installation This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network connected machines driver (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 166). Installation for Mac Reinstallation for Mac Installation for Linux Reinstallation for Linux 157 158 159 160 If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machines driver (see
"Installing the driver locally" on page 26). Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches). Installation for Mac 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 10 Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue. 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 11 Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer list. If your machine supports fax, click Add Fax button to select your fax and add it to your fax list 12 After the installation is finished, click Close. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop. For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 5 Click Continue. 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be Read the license agreement and click Continue. installed. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install. 9 Enter the password and click OK. 1. Software Installation 157 Reinstallation for Mac If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. 1 Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Printer Software Uninstaller. To uninstall printer software, click Continue. 2 3 Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall. 4 5 After the uninstallation is finished, click Close. Enter the password and click OK. If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility or Print & Fax. 1. Software Installation 158 Installation for Linux You need to download the Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads). 8 When the installation is finished, launch printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program). 9 Click Add button. 10 Select your printer. 11 Click the Forward button and add it to your system. 1 Installing the Unified Linux Driver You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system. 3 Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the package to. Extract the package. 4 5 Move to uld folder. 6 Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as a root, execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh") 7 Proceed with the installation. 1. Software Installation 159 Reinstallation for Linux If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. 1 Open Terminal program. 2 Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package. 3 Execute "./uninstall.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root, execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./uninstall.sh") 4 Proceed with the uninstallation. 1. Software Installation 160 2. Using a Network-
Connected Machine This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software. Installing driver over the network IPv6 configuration Useful network programs Wired network setup Wireless network setup Samsung Mobile Print Using the NFC feature AirPrint Google Cloud Print 162 163 166 174 177 203 204 210 212 Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by model" on page 6). Useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing several machines on the network is possible. 2 SyncThru Web Admin Service Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 6). Web-based machine management solution for network administrators. SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access. 1 SyncThru Web Service The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the following tasks (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 300). Check the supplies information and status. Customize machine settings. Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's email automatically. Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. Download this program from Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com
> find your product > Support or Downloads). 3 SetIP wired network setup This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)" on page 163. See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)" on page 164. See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)" on page 165. The machine that does not support the network port, it will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 22). TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 162 Wired network setup 4 Printing a network configuration report You can print Network Configuration Report from the machines control panel that will show the current machines network settings. This will help you to set up a network. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Setting IP address The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 22). TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. 5 First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. The machine has the display screen: Press the control panel and select Network > Network Configuration.
(Menu) button on the The machine has the touch screen: Press Setup from the Main screen >
Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Network Configuration. IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows) Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall. Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machines MAC address and IP address. For example:
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address: 169.254.192.192 The following instructions may differ for your model. 1 Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Follow the instructions in the installation window. 2 3 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 163 Wired network setup 4 5 Turn on the machine. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 6 Click the IP configuration window. icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
The following instructions may vary from your model. 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 7 Enter the machines new information into the configuration window. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. Find the machines MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 163) and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop. For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder. 8 Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac) Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System Preferences > Security > Firewall. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 5 Click Continue. 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be Read the license agreement and click Continue. installed. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 164 Wired network setup Enter the password and click OK. 9 10 When the message that warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 11 Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer Connection Type and click Set IP Address button. 12 Click the IP configuration window. icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
13 Enter the machines new information into the configuration window. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. Find the machines MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 163) and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. 14 Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux) Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System Preferences or Administrator. The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems. 1 Download the SetIP program from the Samsung web site and extract it. 2 Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file in cdroot/Linux/noarch/
at_opt/share/utils folder. 3 Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 4 Enter the machines new information into the configuration window. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. Find the machines MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 163) and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. 5 The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 165 Installing driver over the network Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 6). The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 22). You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive. For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window. Windows The firewall software might be blocking network communication. efore connecting the device to the network, disable the computers firewall. 6 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. Also, your machines IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP address" on page 163). 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run. X:\Setup.exe replacing X with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK. For Windows 8, If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing X with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. If Tap to choose what happens with this disc. pop-up window appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe. 3 4 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window. Then, click Next. Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 166 Installing driver over the network 5 Follow the instructions in the installation window. 3 Click Add a device. From the Windows 8 Start Screen The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads. You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store. a From Charms, select Search. b Click Store. c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience. d Click Install. If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads. If you want to install Samsungs printer management tools, you need to install them using the supplied software CD. Discovered machines will be shown on the screen. 4 Click the model name or host name you wish to use. 5 You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machines control panel that will show the current machines host name (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 194). The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update. Silent installation Mode Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation by typing /s or /S in the command window. Command-line Parameters Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. Also, your machines IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP address" on page 163). 2 From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices. Following command-line are effective and operated when command is used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be operated solely. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 167 Installing driver over the network Command- line Definition Description Command- line Definition Description
/s or
/S Starts silent installation. Installs machine drivers without prompting any UIs or user intervention.
/p<port name> or
/P<port name>
Specifies printer port. Network Port will be created by use of Standard TCP/IP Port monitor. For local port, this port must exist on system before being specified by command. Printer port name can be specified as IP address, hostname, USB local port name, IEEE1284 port name or network path. For example:
/pxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx in where, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx means IP address for network printer. /
pUSB001, /PLPT1:, /
phostname
/
p"\\computer_name\sha red_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared _printer" in where,
"\\computer_name\shar ed_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared _printer" means the network path to the printer by entering two slashes, the computer name or local IP address of the PC sharing the printer, and then the share name of the printer. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 168 Installing driver over the network Command- line Definition Description Command- line Definition Description
/a<dest_path> or
/A<dest_path>
Specifies destination path for installation. The destination path should be a fully qualified path.
/n<Printer name>
or
/N<Printer name>
/nd or
/ND Specifies printer name. Printer instance shall be created as specified printer name. Commands not to set the installed driver as a default machine driver. Since machine drivers should be installed on the OS specific location, this command applies to only application software.
/x or
/X Uses existing machine driver files to create printer instance if it is already installed. Removes only specified printer instance and not the driver files.
/up<printer name> or
/UP<printer name>
With this parameter, you can add printer instances as your wishes. It indicates installed machine driver will not be the default machine driver on your system if there are one or more printer drivers installed. If there is no installed machine driver on your system, then this option wont be applied because Windows OS will set installed printer driver as a default machine driver.
/d or
/D Uninstalls all device drivers and applications from your system.
/v<share name> or
/V<share name>
Shares installed machine and add other available platform drivers for Point &
Print. This command provides a way to install a printer instance that uses installed printer driver files without installing an additional driver. This command provides a way to remove only specified printer instance from your system without effecting other printer drivers. It will not remove printer driver files from your system. This command will remove all installed device drivers and application software from your system. It will install all supported Windows OS platforms machine drivers to system and share it with specified
<share name> for point and print. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 169 Installing driver over the network Command- line Definition Description
/o or
/O Opens Printers and Faxes folder after installation. This command will open Printers and Faxes folder after the silent installation.
/h, /H or /?
Shows Command-line Usage. 7 Mac 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop. For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. Click Continue. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 5 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install. Enter the password and click OK. 9 10 Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue. 11 Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer list. 12 Click IP and select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol. 13 Enter the machines IP address in the Address input field. 14 Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 15 If Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using. 16 Click Add. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 170 Installing driver over the network 17 After the installation is finished, click Close. 8 Linux 9 Click the Add button. 10 Select AppSocket/HP JetDirect and enter your machine's IP address. 11 Click the Forward button and add it to your system. You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads). 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machines IP address should have been set. 2 Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system. 3 Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the package to. 9 UNIX Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 6). The commands are marked with , when typing the commands, do not type . Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Operating System" on page 6). Extract the package. 4 5 Move to uld folder. 6 Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root, execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh") Proceed with the installation. 7 8 When the installation is finished, launch Printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing menu or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program). To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Installing the UNIX printer driver package The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 171 Installing driver over the network 1 From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer Driver package to your computer. 8 2 Acquire root privileges. su -
3 Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer. See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details. 4 Unpack the UNIX printer driver package. For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands. gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -
5 Go to the unpacked directory. 6 Run the install script. /install i install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package. Use chmod 755 install command to give the permission to the installer script. Run installprinter from the command line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to the following procedures. On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two commands on the root terminal:
accept <printer_name>
enable <printer_name>
Uninstalling the printer driver package The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system. a Run uninstallprinter command from the terminal. It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard. The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list. b Select the printer to be deleted. c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system. d Execute the . /install d command to uninstall the whole package. e To verify removal results, execute the . /install c command. 7 Execute the . /install c command to verify installation results. To re-install it, use the command . /install i to reinstall the binaries. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 172 Installing driver over the network Setting up the printer To add the printer to your UNIX system, run installprinter from the command line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window according to the following steps:
11 Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default. 12 Click OK to add the printer. 1 Type the name of the printer. 2 3 Select the appropriate printer model from the model list. Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the Type field. This is optional. 4 5 6 Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional. Specify the printer location in the Location field. Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type, only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed. 7 Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris OS. Select Copies to set the number of copies. 8 9 Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted. 10 Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 173 IPv6 configuration IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 6 or "Menu overview" on page 30). If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting. The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with FE80). Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address. 10 From the control panel Activating IPv6 Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 1 Select control panel.
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
(IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the touch screen. 2 3 Select On and press OK. Turn the machine off and turn it on again. When you install the printer driver, do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6. We recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 174 IPv6 configuration DHCPv6 address configuration If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following options for default dynamic host configuration. Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview"
on page 30). It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. 1 Select control panel.
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
(IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the touch screen. 2 Press OK to select the required value you want. DHCPv6 address: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request. DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request. Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router. 11 From the SyncThru Web Service Activating IPv6 1 Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 If its your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service you need to log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 3 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, move the mouse cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network Settings. 4 Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website. 5 Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6. 6 Click the Apply button. 7 Turn the machine off and turn it on again. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 175 Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets. IPv6 configuration You can also set the DHCPv6. To manually set the IPv6 address:
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text box is activated. Enter the rest of the address
(e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. A is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F). IPv6 address configuration 1 Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. 2 Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 163). Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with FE80). Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. 3 Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 176 Wireless network setup Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features by model" on page 6). If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting. Wireless network name and network password Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information before proceeding with the machine installation. 12 Getting started Understanding your network type Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time. Infrastructure mode This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to communicate with the wireless machine. Ad hoc mode This mode does not use an access point. The wireless computer and wireless machine communicate directly. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 177 Wireless network setup 13 Introducing wireless set up methods You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table. Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country. If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 198). It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points. If you do not set the password on Acess Points, they might be exposed to illegal access from unknown machine including PCs, smart phones and printers. Refer to the Access Point user guide for password settings. Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference From the computer Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 183. With Access Point From the machines control panel Mac user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 188. See "Using a network cable" on page 193. See "Machines with a display (or touch) screen" on page 180. See "Machines without a display screen" on page 181. See "Using the menu button or touch screen" on page 182. Without Access Point From the computer Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 186. Wi-Fi Direct setup See "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 196. Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 191. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 178 Wireless network setup 14 Using the WPS button If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer. If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point (or wireless router) you are using. When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Items to prepare Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS). Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS). Networked computer (PIN mode only) Choosing your type There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network using the
(WPS) button on the control panel. The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.
(WPS) button on the The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-
Fi Protected Setup WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router). Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment. For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, follow the next procedure:
a Press Setup from the Main screen. b Press Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings. c Select the setup method you want. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 179 Wireless network setup Machines with a display (or touch) screen Connecting in PIN mode Connecting in PBC mode 1 For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings. 2 3 4 Press PBC (or Connect via PBC). Press OK when the confirmation window appears. Information window appears showing 2 minutes connection processing time. Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. c AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process, the APs SSID information appears on the display. 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network. 1 For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings. 2 3 4 Press PIN (or Connect via PIN). Press OK when the confirmation window appears. The eight-digit PIN appears on the display. You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router). The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network. b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. c SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection process, the APs SSID information is displayed on the LCD display. 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 180 Wireless network setup Machines without a display screen Connecting in PIN mode Connecting in PBC mode 1 Press and hold the seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4 The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the access point (or wireless router). Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. 2 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network. 2 3 1 The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 163).
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button on In ready mode, press and hold the the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machines PIN. Press and hold the 4 seconds until the status LED stays on.
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router). You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router). The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-
digit PIN. The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on. 4 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 181 Wireless network setup Re-connecting to a network Disconnecting from a network When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless connection settings and address. In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the wireless network:
The machine is turned off and on again. The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again. To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the the control panel for more than two seconds.
(WPS) button on When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off. When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS LED turns off. Canceling the connection process To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to
(Stop or Stop/Clear) on the the wireless network, press and release the control panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless network. 15 Using the menu button or touch screen Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 182 Wireless network setup After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 166). 1 Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless >
WLAN Settings on the touch screen. 2 Press the OK to select the setup method you want. Search List (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic. The machine will display a list of available networks from which to choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the corresponding security key. Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own SSID
, or choose the security option in detail. Setup using Windows Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD: If you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD(see "Accessing management tools" on page 295). 16 Access point via USB cable (recommended) Items to prepare Access point Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable Creating the infrastructure network 1 Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2 Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 183 Wireless network setup 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 5 Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Next. If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run. X:\Setup.exe replacing X with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK. For Windows 8, If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing X with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. If Tap to choose what happens with this disc. pop-up window appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe. 4 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window. Then, click Next. 6 On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next. If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my printer is already connected to my network. 7 After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 184 Wireless network setup If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive). Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES). Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value. Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network password value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security settings. Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router). 8 When the network connection window appears, disconnect the network cable. Then, click Next. The network cable connection can interfere with searching for wireless devices. 9 If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its corresponding screen will appear. If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If not, click just Next. Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 197). Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name and the maximum length is 22 characters. Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 185 Wireless network setup 10 When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click Next. 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 11 Follow the instructions in the installation window. Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by following the simple steps below. Items to prepare Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable Creating the ad hoc network in Windows 1 Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2 Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine. If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run. X:\Setup.exe replacing X with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK. For Windows 8, If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing X with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. If Tap to choose what happens with this disc. pop-up window appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe. 4 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window. Then, click Next. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 186 Wireless network setup 5 Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Next. 6 On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next. If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my printer is already connected to my network. 7 After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). Operation Mode: Select ad hoc. Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value. Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network password value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security enabled. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 8 The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click Next. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 187 Wireless network setup Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computers network configuration information. If the computers network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computers network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example, If the computers network information is as shown follows:
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machines network information should be as below:
-
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 IP address: 169.254.133.43 The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next. 9 10 When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click Next. 11 Follow the instructions in the installation window. 17 Setup using Mac Access point via USB cable (recommended) Items to prepare Access point Network-connected printer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 188 Wireless network setup 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 10 Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue. 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop. For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 5 Click Continue. 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be Read the license agreement and click Continue. installed. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install. 9 Enter the password and click OK. 11 After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next. When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive). Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 189 Wireless network setup Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP, AES) Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value. Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network password value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security enabled. Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router). 12 If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its corresponding screen will appears. If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If not, click just Next. Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 197). Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name and the maximum length is 22 characters. Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters. 13 When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 190 Wireless network setup 14 Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished, click Quit. After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on page 157). Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by following these simple directions. Items to prepare Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable Creating the ad hoc network in Mac 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop. For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder. 4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon. 5 Click Continue. 6 7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 8 Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be Read the license agreement and click Continue. installed. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install. 9 Enter the password and click OK. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 191 Wireless network setup 10 Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue. 11 After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting. Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is case-
sensitive). Operation Mode: Select ad hoc. Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value. Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network password value. WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security setting. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 12 The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the settings and click Next. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 192 Wireless network setup Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computers network configuration information. If the computers network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computers network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example, If the computers network information is shown as follows:
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machines network information should be as shown below:
-
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 IP address: 169.254.133.43 13 When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.. If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the machine when configuring the wireless network. 14 The wireless network connects according to the network configuration. 15 Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click Quit. After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on page 157). Using a network cable Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 22). 18 Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration procedures. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 193 Wireless network setup After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 166). See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration. Items to prepare Access point Network-connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface Network cable IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. See "Setting IP address" on page 163. Configuring the machines wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network. To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru Web Service. Printing a network configuration report Using SyncThru Web Service You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report. Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection status. See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 163. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 194 Wireless network setup 1 Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 7 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your machines new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 4 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 6 Click Wireless > Wizard. Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom. Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list. SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is case sensitive. Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections (see "Wireless network name and network password"
on page 177).
-
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer-to-peer environment. Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point. If your networks Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machines SSID. 8 Click Next. If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered password (network password) and click Next. 9 The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If the setup is right, click Apply. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 195 Wireless network setup 19 Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously. 4 Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 10 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network. 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off 6 Click Wireless > Custom. You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off. If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the machines control panel using the Network menu. 20 Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing 1 Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your machines new IP address in the browser window. For example, Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the Wi-Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode. With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network. 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 196 Wireless network setup You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the printers Wi-Fi Direct. The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP services. The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3. Setting up Wi-Fi Direct You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods. From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended) After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be set and changes in the Wi-Fi Direct can be made. Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
-
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings >
Network. Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable. Device Name: Enter the printers name for searching for your printer on a wireless network. By default, the device name is the model name. IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is used only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless network. We recommend using the default local IP address (the default local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is 192.168.3.1 ) Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi Direct groups owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point. We recommend activating this option. Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your printer. You can configure a network password yourself, or can remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated by default. From the machine (Machines with a display screen) Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on page 30 ). Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct on the touch screen. Enable Wi-Fi Direct. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 197 Wireless network setup From the network-connected computer If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru Web Service. Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct. Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options. For Linux OS users,
- Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 163).
- Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
- Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct. Setting up the mobile device When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile device. If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button. 21 Troubleshooting for wireless network Problems during setup or driver installation Printers Not Found Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the machine. After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct. After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your smartphone. USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect the machine to your computer using the USB cable. The machine does not support wireless networking. Check the machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 198 Wireless network setup Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try connecting again. Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 199 Wireless network setup Connecting Failure - Invalid Security Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your access point and machine. Connecting Failure - General Connection Error Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB cable and your machines power. Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired network cable from your machine. Connecting Failure - Assigning the IP address Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router) and machine. PC Connection Error The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine.
-
For a DHCP network environment The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is configured to DHCP. If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address. How to compare:
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the IP address (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 163). 2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer. a Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Settings. b For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers. c Right-click your machine. d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7/8 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. e Click Port tab. f Click Configure Port... button. g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network configuration Sheet. 3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network information report's. If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP, Connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 200 Wireless network setup
-
For a Static network environment The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured to static address. For example, If the computers network information is as shown below:
IP address: 169.254.133.42 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 IP address: 169.254.133.43 Then the machines network information should be as below:
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computers subnet mask.) Gateway: 169.254.133.1 Other problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own user's guide. You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time. Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be turned on. Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the signal. Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication. Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the communication. If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the machine again. Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can check the IP address by printing the network configuration report. Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless router) administrator. Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset. Register the product's MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the MAC address of your machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 163). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 201 Wireless network setup Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router). If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g. If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may not connect to your machine. This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported. When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine. You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machines. The machine is within the range of the wireless network. The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless router) and the machine. Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete. The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices. Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router) changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again. The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 202 24 Supported Mobile OS Android OS 2.3 or higher iOS 4.0 or higher Samsung Mobile Print 22 What is Samsung Mobile Print?
Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos, documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Androidand iOS smart phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isnt necessary just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application, and it will automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos, web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have a Samsung multifunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for quick and easy viewing on your mobile device. 23 Downloading Samsung Mobile Print To download Samsung Mobile Print, go to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your mobile device, and just search for Samsung Mobile Print. You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your computer. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 203 Using the NFC feature The NFC (Near Field Communication) printer allows you to directly print/scan/
fax from your mobile device just by holding your mobile device over the NFC tag on your printer. It does not require installing print driver or connecting to an access point. You just need NFC supported mobile device. In order to use this feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed on your mobile device. Depending on the material of the mobile device cover, NFC recognition may not work properly. Depending on the mobile device you are using, the transmission speed may differ. This feature is available only for the model with a NFC tag (see "Machine overview" on page 20). Using a cover or a battery other than the ones that came with the mobile device, or a metal cover/sticker can block NFC. If NFC devices keep failing to communicate, remove and reinstall the battery from the mobile device, then try again. Requirements NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled, Samsung Mobile Print app installed mobile device with Android OS 4.0 or higher Only Android OS 4.1 or higher will automatically enable the Wi-Fi Direct feature on your mobile device when you enable the NFC feature. We recommend you to upgrade your mobile device to Android OS 4.1 or higher to use the NFC feature. 25 Wi-Fi Direct feature enabled printer (see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 197). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 204 Using the NFC feature 26 Printing 1 Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile deviceand Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 196). 2 Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer. Wait few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start. For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging. If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to update the PIN number. If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app download page. Download the app and try again. 3 4 Select print mode. Select the content you want to print. If neccessary, change the print option by pressing the
. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 205 Using the NFC feature 5 Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer. 27 Scanning Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer. 1 Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile deviceand Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 196). 2 Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer. Wait few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start. For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging. If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to update the PIN number. 6 The printer starts printing. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 206 Using the NFC feature 3 4 For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging. If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to update the PIN number. If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app download page. Download the app and try again. Select scan mode. Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). If necessary, change the scan option by pressing the
. 5 Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer. For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging. If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to update the PIN number. 6 The printer starts scanning the content. The scanned data is saved on your mobile device. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 207 Using the NFC feature 28 If you want to continue scanning, follow the instruction on the app screen. Sending Fax 1 Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile deviceand Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 196). 2 Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer. Wait few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start. 3 4 For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging. If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to update the PIN number. If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app download page. Download the app and try again. Select fax mode. Select the content you want to send fax. If necessary, enter the fax number and change the fax option by pressing the
. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 208 Using the NFC feature 5 Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer. Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer. For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging. If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to update the PIN number. 6 The printer starts faxing the content. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 209 AirPrint 29 Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark. 4 Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. If its your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS. ID: admin Password: sec00000 Setting up AirPrint Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following methods. 30 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings. 6 Click Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP or mDNS . You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNSprotocol. Printing via AirPrint 1 Check whether the machine is connected to the network. 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your machines new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3 Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
Touch the action icon(
1 Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print. 2 3 4 Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up. Touch Print button. Print it out.
). 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 210 AirPrint Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary, click the print center icon (
) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in the print center. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 211 Google Cloud Print Google Cloud Print is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your smart phone, tablet or any other web-connected devices. Just register your Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud Print service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome browser, or a Gmail/ Google Docs application on your mobile device, so you dont need to install the printer driver on the mobile device.Refer to the Google website (http://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://
support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud Print. 31 Registering your Google account to the printer Registering from Samsung Mobile Print app In order to use this feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed on your cell phone. Select device setting. 1 Open Samsung Mobile Print app from your mobile device. 2 3 4 Enter your printers name and description. Select Google Cloud Print. If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure the proxys IP and port number from Proxy Setting. Contact your network service provider or network administrator for more information. 5 Click Register . Confirm your printer in the pop-up window.. 6 Click Finish. Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service. Registering from the Chrome Browser Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet. You should create your Google account in the advance. 1 Open the Chrome browser. 2 Visit www.google.com. 3 Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail address. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 212 Google Cloud Print 4 Enter your printers IP address in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 5 Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service website. 6 If its your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service you need to log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 32 If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups. 10 Click Finish printer registration. 11 Click Manage your printers. Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service. Google Cloud Print-ready devices will appear in the list. If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure the proxys IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Google Cloud PrintProxy Setting. Contact your network service provider or network administrator for more information. Printing with Google Cloud Print The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using.You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print service. 7 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print. Enter your printers name and description. 8 9 Click Register. The confirmation pop-up window appears. Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet. Printing from an application on mobile device The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs app from Android mobile phone. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 213 Google Cloud Print 1 Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device. If you do not have the application, download it from the application store such as Android Market or App Store. Select Print with Google Cloud Print. 5 6 Click the Print button. button of the document that you want to print. Tap the send Tap the option 2 Access the Google Docs application from your mobile device. 3 4 5 6 7 Set the printing options if you want. Tap Click here to Print. Tap the Cloud Print button. button. Printing from the Chrome browser The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser. 1 Run Chrome. 2 Open the document or email that you want to print. 3 Click the wrench icon 4 Click Print. A new tab for printing appears. in the browsers top right corner. 2. Using a Network-Connected Machine 214 3. Useful Setting Menus This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for advanced machine setup. Before you begin reading a chapter Print Copy Fax Scan System setup Admin setup Eco Direct USB 216 217 218 224 229 233 246 247 248 Before you begin reading a chapter This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features. You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 30). The following are tips for using this chapter The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machines functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing or from the touch screen.
(Menu) Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. For models that do not have the
(Menu) on the control panel, this feature is not applicable (see "Control panel overview" on page 23). Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. 3. Useful Setting Menus 216 Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Print Setup on the touch screen. Emulation Print Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel. Item Description Selects the direction in which information is printed on a page. Portrait Orientation Landscape Copies You can enter the number of copies using the number keypad. Item Description Resolution Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and graphics. Clear Text Prints text darker than on a normal document. Sets the emulation type and option. Emulation Type: The machine language defines how the computer communicates with the machine. Setup: Sets the detailed settings for the selected emulation type. Edge Enhance It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics for improving readability. Trapping Screen It reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color channels in color printing mode. Also black text will be overprinted on other colors. This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. Normal: This mode will generate printouts with smooth tone over the entire page. Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the page. Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with sharp details over the entire page. Select Tray Sets the select tray type. 3. Useful Setting Menus 217 Copy 1 Copy feature Item Description Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see
"Reduced or enlarged copy" on page 61). Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Reduce/Enlarge To change the menu options:
Press
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel. Or
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Copy Default on the touch screen. Or press Copy > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Original Size Sets the image size. Darkness Original Type Auto Color If the machine is set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not available. Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 60) Improves the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job (see "Original Type" on page 61) You can sets whether to use Auto color on or off. On: Select this setting to automatically detect whether the scanned document is in color or black and white, and then select an appropriate color setting. Copies You can enter the number of copies using the number keypad. Basic Copy Copies can be started quickly. Custom Copy Copies can be customized through detailed options. 3. Useful Setting Menus 218 Copy Item Description Item Description Color Mode Tray Stamp You can select the default color mode to use for copy jobs. Auto: Select this setting to automatically detect whether the scanned document is in color or black and white, and then select an appropriate color setting. Color: Select this setting to print the same as the original image color. Mono: Select this setting to print the copy in black and white, regardless whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. Allows you to check the current tray settings and change the settings if necessary. Auto: You can set the machine to automatically to the tray with the same sized paper when the tray in use is empty. You can apply the stamp feature. Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page number, device information, comment, or user ID, to the copy output. Opacity: You can select the transparency. Position: Sets the position. Auto Fit Copy Copies image to fit automatically to the paper size. Layout ID Copy Collation Collation Copy Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy, 2/4-up, etc. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card (see "ID card copying" on page 62). Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document. On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals. Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages. 3. Useful Setting Menus 219 Copy Item 2-up or 4-up N-up Copy Description Item Description Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper. 1 3 2 4 2 1 Book Copy The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book. If the book is too thick, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open. Off: Does not use this feature. Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the book. Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the book. Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of the book. This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. 3. Useful Setting Menus 220 Copy Item Description Item Description Adjust Bkgd. Adjust Background Prints an image without its background. This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog. Off: Does not use this feature. Auto: Optimizes the background. Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is. Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter Edge Erase the background is. Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and staple marks along any of the four edges of a document. Off: Does not use this feature. SmallOriginal: rases the edge of the original if it is small. This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes. Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and horizontal, when you copy a book. This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Border Erase: Enter the left, right, top, bottom margin using Number keypad. 3. Useful Setting Menus 221 Copy Item Description Item Description 2->1Sided 2->2Sided 2->1Sided Rotated Duplex (continue) Watermark Duplex The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper. 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints it on one side of the paper. 1->2Sided 1->2Sided Rotated 3. Useful Setting Menus 222 Copy Copy Setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 2 To change the menu options:
Press
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel. Or
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel. Item Description Change Default The copy options can be set to those most frequently used. 3. Useful Setting Menus 223 Fax Fax Feature Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 3 To change the menu options:
Press
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default on the touch screen. Or press Fax > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen. Resolution Color Mode Item Description Duplex Original Size Sets the image size. Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned. Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 69). Item Description The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax (see "Resolution" on page 68). Selects the color mode in which you want to send the fax. Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white. Color: Transmits a fax in color. This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper. 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only. 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides. 2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees. To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the originals on the DADF. If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided. Memory Send Fax can be customized through detailed options. 3. Useful Setting Menus 224 Fax Item Description Item Description On Hook Dial Access a dial tone to send fax. Speed Dial Send Fax image to destination from speed dial list. Group Dial Send Fax image to destination from group dial list. Redial Multi Send Send Forward Receive Forward Secure Receive Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode (see "Redialing the fax number" on page 282). Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax to multiple destinations" on page 67). You cannot send a color fax using this feature. Cancel Job Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful. See "Forwarding a sentfax to another destination"
on page 284. See "Forwarding a received fax" on page 285. Stores the received fax in memory without printing out. To print received documents, you need to enter the password. You can prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving in secure receiving mode" on page 289). Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory
(see "Canceling a reserved fax job" on page 284). Delay Send Delayed Send Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present (see "Delaying a fax transmission" on page 283). You cannot send a color fax using this feature. 4 Sending setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 3. Useful Setting Menus 225 Fax To change the menu options:
Item Description Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default Modem speed on the touch screen. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen. Image TCR Item Redial Times Description Dial Mode Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the machine will not redial. Redial Term Sets the time interval before automatic redialling. Toll Save Select the maximum modem speed you want if the phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed. You can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4, 12.0, 9.6 or 4.8 kbps. Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of the first page of the fax sent. Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This setting may not be available depending on your country. Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save on call costs. This setting may not be available depending on your country. Prefix Dial ECM Mode Fax Confirmation Fax Send Confirmation Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful for accessing a PABX exchange. Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any error. It may take more time. Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission was successfully completed or not. If you select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful. 5 Setup Wizard Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options such as machine ID, fax number, etc. Receiving setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 3. Useful Setting Menus 226 Fax To change the menu options:
Item Description Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default on the touch screen. DRPD Mode Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen. Item Receive Mode Description Selects the default fax receiving modesee "Changing the receive modes" on page 287. Duplex Print Ring To Answer Specifies the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call. Stamp RCV Name Rcv Start Code Auto Reduction Discard Size Automatically prints the page number, and the date and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a received fax. Initiates fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the factory. Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine. Discards a specific length from the end of the received fax. Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. You can set the machine to recognize different ring patterns for each number. This setting may not be available depending on your country (see "Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 288). Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper. You can save the paper usage. Off: Prints only one side of the paper. Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however, the binding will be the long edge. Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however, the binding will be the short edge. 3. Useful Setting Menus 227 Fax Change Default setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 6 To change the menu options:
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Change Default on the control Press panel. Item Description Change Default The fax options can be set to those most frequently used. 3. Useful Setting Menus 228 Scan Scan feature Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 7 To change the menu options:
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel. Or Scan to >
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel. Item FTP Feature FTP Default FTP SMB Feature SMB Default SMB Local PC Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default on the touch screen. Network PC Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Description Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan the originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 277). Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You scan the originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 277). Sets scan destination to a usb-connected computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a directory such as My Documents (see "Basic Scanning"
on page 65). Sets scan destination to a network-connected computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a directory such as My Documents (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page 275). Item USB Default USB Feature USB Email Default Custom Email Scan to Email Description Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a USB device. Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the originals and email the scanned image to destinations (see
"Scanning to email" on page 276). 3. Useful Setting Menus 229 Scan Item Description Item Description File Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If you select JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages. Depending on the selected scan type, this option may not appear. Single-TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file. Multi-TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), but several originals are scanned as one file. Single-PDF: Scans the originals in PDF, and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file. Multi-PDF: Scans originals in PDF, but several originals are scanned as one file. Single-XPS: Scans the originals in XPS, and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file. Multi-XPS: Scans originals in XPS, but several originals are scanned as one file. JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format. XPS: This feature is only supported for the devices that have mass storage. The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if Mono has been selected for Color Mode. Shared Folder Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You can create and use the shared folder (see "Using shared folder features" on page 291). Scan setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 8 To change the menu options:
Press
(scan) >
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel. Or Scan to >
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default on the touch screen. Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Destination Enter the destinations information. 3. Useful Setting Menus 230 Scan Item Description Item Description Change Default Original Size Original Type Resolution The scan options can be set to those most frequently used. Sets the image size. Sets the original documents type. Sets the image resolution. You can select the color options of scan outputs. Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel. Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel. Duplex Color Mode Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel. Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to scan. File Policy Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of the paper (2 Sided Rotated). 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides. 2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, the machine shows the window asking to place another page. Load another original and press Yes. When you finish, select No for this option. You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through server or USB memory device. If the server or the USB memory device already has the same name you enter, you can change the name, cancel the job, or overwrite it. Rename: The sent file is saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed. Overwrite: Overwrites the existing the file. File Name Makes a file name to store the scan data. 3. Useful Setting Menus 231 Scan Item Description Item Description You can set the machine to print server confirmation result report. Server Confirmation If you select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful. You can set the machine to print email confirmation result report. CC BCC WSD Email Confirmation If you select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful. If a report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support, Unknown could be printed instead of the characters/
fonts in the report. PDF Encryption Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in PDF format. Select On to encrypt the PDF file, and set up a password. To open the file, users need to enter the password Subject From Sets an emails subject. Sets a senders email address. Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient. The same as CC but the recipient's name is not displayed Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the connected computer if it supports the WSD (Web Service for Device) feature. 3. Useful Setting Menus 232 System setup Machine setup Item Description Receive Mode Selects the default fax receiving mode. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Receive code 9 This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the fax machine *9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory (see "Receiving faxes with an extension telephone" on page 288). To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel. Select Country Selects the country. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup on the touch Sound/Volume Sets the sound/volume option. If toner in the cartridge has run out, a message informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for this message to appear or not. screen. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > select the menu item you want on the Toner Status Alert touch screen. Item Machine ID Fax Number Description Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of each fax page that you send. Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of each fax page that you send. Date & Time Sets the date and time. Clock Mode Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and 24 hr. 3. Useful Setting Menus 233 System setup Item Description Item Description You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the memory. The machine overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery. Manual: When printing, copying, scanning, and faxing, the machine temporarily uses memory space. For security reasons, you can set the machine to manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to secure memory space, you can manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. Automatic: When a job is completed, there are temporary images left in the memory. For security reasons, you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to secure memory space, you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory Sets the language of the text that appears on the control panel display. Sets the machines default mode among fax mode, copy mode, or scan mode. ImageOverwrite Language Default Mode Default Paper Size You can set the default paper size to use. Power Save Sets how long the machine waits before going to power save mode. When the machine does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered. System Timeout Job Timeout Sets the time that the machine remembers previously used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine restores the default copy settings. Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing the last page of a print job that does not end with a command to print the page. Wakeup Event loading paper in a tray When this option is "On", you can wake up the machine from the power saving mode with the following actions:
pressing any button on the control panel opening or closing the front cover pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in connecting a USB memory device (only for the models that support USB memory devices) If the machine does not have the touch screen, you can wake up the machine from the power saving mode by pressing any button on the control panel regardless of this options setting. 3. Useful Setting Menus 234 System setup Item Description Item Description Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match the paper settings. 0 Sec: This option allows you to continue printing when the paper size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray. 30 Sec: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message will display. The machine waits for about 30 second, then automatically clear the message and continue printing. Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits until you insert the correct paper. Optimize print quality according to the machines altitude. Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the environment. Allows you to append the required carriage return to each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users. Auto Continue Altitude Adjustment Humidity Auto CR Firmware Version Shows the products firmware version. Auto Tray Switch Paper Substitution Skip Blank Pages Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match. For example, if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper, the machine automatically prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper. This option does not appear if you selected Auto for Paper Source from printer driver. Automatically substitutes the printer drivers paper size to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4. For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine prints on A4 paper and vice versa. The printer detects the printing data from computer whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or skip the blank page. Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature. If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is excluded during tray switching. Tray Protection This setting works for copy or print jobs: It doesn't affect fax jobs. 3. Useful Setting Menus 235 System setup Item Description Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as a PDF file. Standard: Saves the data as a regular PDF. PDF/A: Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary information to render itself in any environment. PDF Type Stamp PDF/A file must be self-contained: it cannot rely on another application to render fonts, open hyperlinks, or execute scripts, audio files, or video files. Eco Settings You can apply the stamp feature. Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page number, device information, or user ID, to the copy output. Opacity: You can select the transparency. Position: Sets the position. Address Book Views or prints the phone book or email address list. Vapor Mode Import Setting Export Setting Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the machine. Exports data stored on the machine stick to a USB memory. Item CLR Empty Msg Description When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You can clear the empty message. Troubleshooting Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. Allows you to save print resources and enables eco-
friendly printing. Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off. On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode on/off, the user needs to enter the password. Select Template: Selects the eco template set from the SyncThru Web Service. You can reduce the amount of water vapor produced during printing. Off: Disables vapor mode. On: Enables vapor mode. Auto: Automatically enters vapor mode according to time in high humidity environments. 3. Useful Setting Menus 236 System setup Item Description Turns power off automatically when the machine has been in power save mode for the length of time set in Auto Power Off > On > Timeout. Auto Power Off Image Management Image Mgr. Custom Color To turn the machine on again, press the
(Power/Wake Up) button on the control panel (make sure the main power switch is on). If you run the printer driver or Samsung Easy Printer Manager, the time automatically extends. While the machine is connected to the network or working on a print job, Auto Power Off feature doesn't work. Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color registration, color density, etc. This menu allows you to adjust contrast, color by color. Default: Optimizes colors automatically. Print Density: Allows you to manually adjust the color density for print. Adjust the print density. It is recommended to use the Default setting for best color quality. Item Auto Color Reg. Auto Color Registration Description The machine virtually prints certain patterned image to calibrate the color printing position. This feature enhances the colored image sharper and clearer, which means the machine prints the colored image on the paper more like the one in the monitor. Tone Adjustment If you have moved the machine, it is strongly recommended to operate this menu manually. Default: The machine automatically calibrates the toner density of machine for the best possible color print quality. If you select Off, the machine is calibrated by the factory default toner density. Auto Tone Adjustment (Auto Tone Adj.): Allows you to automatically adjust tone for the best possible print quality. Calibrating ID Sensor (Cal. ID Sensor): Automatically calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or machine parts and uses this information to adjust the color density. For example, if the yellow toner is running out, the machine calculates the amount of remaining yellow toner and adjusts color density so the printouts are fine. 3. Useful Setting Menus 237 System setup Paper setup 10 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Common Margin To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Paper Setup on the touch screen. Item Paper Size Description Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according to your requirements. Emulation Margin Paper Type Chooses the type of the paper for each tray. Paper Source Selects from which tray the paper is used. Margin Sets the margins for the document. Item Description Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided printing. Duplex Margin: Sets the margin for double-sided printing. Binding: When printing on both sides of the paper, side A's margin closest to the binding will be the same as side B's margin closest to the binding. Likewise, the sides' margins farthest from the binding will be the same. Top Margin: Sets the top margin. Left Margin: Sets the left margin. Sets the paper margins for emulation print page. Top Margin: Sets the top margin. Left Margin: Sets the left margin. Sets the paper margins in multi-purpose tray. Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided printing. MP Tray Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided printing. Top Margin: Sets the top margin. Left Margin: Sets the left margin. Manual Feeder Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray. 3. Useful Setting Menus 238 System setup Item Description Tray Confirm Activates the tray confirmation message. If you open and close a tray, a window asking you whether to set the paper size and type for the tray just opened appears. Sets the paper margins for the paper trays. Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided printing.
<Tray X>
Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided Item Key Sound Alarm Sound printing. Top Margin: Sets the top margin. Left Margin: Sets the left margin. Sound / Volume Speaker Volume Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 11 To change the menu options:
Description Turns the key sound on oroff. A tone sounds each time a key is pressed if this option is on. Turns the alarm sound on oroff. An alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication ends if this option is on. Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker is on until the remote machine answers. You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is connected. a Press b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from
(fax) on the control panel. the speaker. c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you want. d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode. Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Initial Setup > Sound/Volume on the touch screen. Dial Tone volume Adjusts the dial tone volume. You can select different levels. Ring Volume Adjusts the ring volume. You can select different levels. 3. Useful Setting Menus 239 System setup Report Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 12 To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel. Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Reports on the touch screen. Item Description Prints a report on the machine's overall configuration. Prints supplies information page. Configuration Supplies Info. Supplies Information Address Book Demo Page Item Description Fax Sent Fax Received Email Sent Fax Scheduled Jobs Fax Schedule Jobs Network Configuration PCL Font List PS Font List Usage Counter Prints information on the faxes you have recently sent. Prints information on the faxes you have recently received. Prints information on the emails you have recently sent. Prints the document list currently stored for delayed faxes along with the starting time and type of each operation. Prints information on your machines network connection and configuration. Prints the PCL font list. Prints the PS/PS3 font list. Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the total number of pages printed. Prints all of the email addresses currently stored in the machines memory. Prints the demo page to check whether your machine is printing properly or not. Fax Options Prints the information of a fax reports. Account This is only available when Job Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru Web Admin Service. You can print a report of printout counts for each user. Fax Send Confirmation Prints fax confirmation result. 3. Useful Setting Menus 240 System setup Maintenance 13 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Paper Stacking To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel. Item Description CLR Empty Msg. When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You can clear the empty message. Supplies Life Image Mar. Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the supplies life" on page 95.) Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color registration, color density, etc. TonerLow Alert Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty
(see "Setting the toner low alert" on page 96). Serial Number Shows the machines serial number. When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you can find this. Item Description If you use a machine in a humid area, or you are using the damp print media caused by a high humidity, the print-
outs on the output tray may be curled and may not be stacked properly. In this case, you can set the machine to use this function to let print-outs be stacked firmly. But, using this function will make the print speed slow. Ram Disk Enables/disables Ram disk to manage jobs. Job manage Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). 14 To change the menu options:
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage on the control panel. Item Active Job Stored Job Description Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed. Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk. 3. Useful Setting Menus 241 System setup 15 Item Description Secured Job Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk. Address book setup 16 Document box Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Press Document Box > Next > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book on the touch screen. Option System Boxes Option PhoneBook Email Print Reset Description Adds, views, prints or deletes the phone book list. You also can create a group. Adds, views, prints or deletes the email list. You also can create a group. Shared Folder Prints the address book. Resets the current address book Description Stores the printing data or prints the secure page. Stored Print: Prints out the stored data without entering password. Secured Print: Prints out the stored data with entering password. Show the shared folders on your network and save your jobs there. 3. Useful Setting Menus 242 Network setup Option Description System setup 17 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). TCP/IP (IPv4) You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service. Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine. When SyncThru Web Service opens, click Settings >
Network Settings (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 300). Press
(Menu)> System Setup> Network on the control panel, Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup on the touch Ethernet Speed screen. Selects the appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environmentsee
"Setting IP address" on page 163). There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are not sure, leave as is, or consult the network administrator. TCP/IP (IPv6) Selects this option to use the network environment through IPv6 (see "IPv6 configuration" on page 174). Configure the network transmission speed. Turn the power off and on after you change this option. 802.1x You can selects the user authentication for network communication. For detailed information consult the network administrator. Wireless Selects this option to use the wireless network. 3. Useful Setting Menus 243 System setup Option Description Option Description Reverts the network settings to the default values. Clear Settings Turn the power off and on after you change this option. WINS Network Configuration This list shows information on your machines network connection and configuration. Net. Activate Ethernet Activate You can set whether to use Ethernet on or off. SNMP V1/V2 Turn the power off and on after you change this option. SNTP You can set whether to use SyncThru Web Service or not. Http Activate Turn the power off and on after you change this option. UPnP(SSDP) You can configure the WINS server. WINS(Windows Internet Name Service) is used in the Windows operating system. Turn the power off and on after you change this option. You can set SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). Administrators can use SNMP to monitor and manage machines on the network. You can set SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) settings. SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the computer systems through the Internet (NTP) so there would not be a time difference when exchanging data. You can set UPNP protocol. Turn the power off and on after you change this option. MDNS SetIP You can set mDNS (Multicast Domain Name System) settings. You can set SetIP settings. 3. Useful Setting Menus 244 System setup Option Description You can configure SLP (Service Location Protocol) settings. This protocol allows host applications to find services in a local area network without prior configuration. SLP Turn the power off and on after you change this option. 3. Useful Setting Menus 245 Admin setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). Press Setup > Admin Setup > Next on the touch screen. Item Description You can control user access to a machine. You can assign different levels of permissions to use the machine to each user User Access Control You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service. Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine. When SyncThru Web Service opens, click the Security tab > User Access Control (see
"Registering authorized users" on page 258). Change Admin. Password Changes the machines password for accessing the Admin Setup. Firmware Upgrade Stamp To upgrade the latest firmware, turn this option "On" and then download the firmware file. Sets the stamp feature to access the Admin Setup menu. 3. Useful Setting Menus 246 Eco Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). To change the menu options:
Press Eco > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Eco-On Settings Select eco mode and change on/off or on-forced option. Sets eco-related settings and change default settings. Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the default mode. Feature Configuration: Select the Default mode or Custom mode. 3. Useful Setting Menus 247 Direct USB Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on page 30). To change the menu options:
Press Direct USB > select the menu item you want on the touch screen. Item Description Print From Scan to USB File Manage Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file to print. Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a USB device. Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file to delete. You can format the USB device. Show Space Shows the remaining space. 3. Useful Setting Menus 248 4. Special Features This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features. Altitude adjustment Storing email address Entering various characters Setting up the fax address book Registering authorized users Printing features Scan features Fax features Using shared folder features Using optional device features 250 251 253 254 258 259 274 282 291 292 The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7. It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models. Altitude adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine for the best print quality. Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are. 4,000 m
(13,123 ft) 3,000 m
(9,842 ft) 2,000 m
(6,561 ft) 1,000 m
(3,280 ft) 0 1 2 3 4 1 High 3 2 High 2 3 High 1 4 Normal You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in
program. For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Settings" on page 307.
(Switch to advanced mode)Device Settings, see "Device If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 300). You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machines display (see "Machines basic settings" on page 37). 4. Special Features 250 Storing email address This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book. 1 Storing on your machine To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up email address using SyncThru Web Service. 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 300). 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 4 Click Address Book > Individual > Add. 5 Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax number. If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB or FTP and set the information. 6 Click Apply. If you make a group, 1 Click Address Book > Group > Add Group. 2 Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name. You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s) after this group is created. 3 Click Apply. 4. Special Features 251 Storing email address 2 Searching for an email address Searching sequentially through memory 1 Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an address group > All on the control panel. Or select Scan to >
address group > All on the control panel.
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Email >
View List > Individual or Group on the touch screen. 2 Search through the entire memory in index (numerical) order, and select the name and address you want. Searching with a particular first letter 1 Select address group > ID on the control panel.
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an Or select Scan to >
address group > ID on the control panel.
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an 2 3 Enter the first few letters of the name you want. Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears. 4. Special Features 252 Entering various characters As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your companys name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names. 3 Entering alphanumeric characters Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you want to enter, see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 253. You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice. To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow button. Keypad letters and numbers Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models. Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you are doing. 4 Key Assigned numbers, letters, or characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
*
#
@ / . 1 A B C a b c 2 D E F d e f 3 G H I g h i 4 J K L j k l 5 M N O m n o 6 P Q R S p q r s 7 T U V t u v 8 W X Y Z w x y z 9
& + - , 0
* % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
# = | ? " : { } < > ;
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.) 4. Special Features 253 Setting up the fax address book You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book. 6 Using speed dial numbers 5 When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want. Registering a speed dial number 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Individual >
screen.
(options) > Add on the touch For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2 seconds. For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s) and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds. 2 3 4 5 Enter a speed dial number and press OK. 1 Press Fax > Speed Dial Send or Group Dial Send > Next on the touch screen. If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial number, press
(Back). 2 3 Select the number you want. Press Send. Enter the name you want and press OK. Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. 4. Special Features 254 Setting up the fax address book 7 8 Editing speed dial numbers 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial number, press
(Back). Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Individual on the touch screen. 3 Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dials name to put in the group. Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK. 2 3 Change the name and press OK. 4 Change the fax number and press OK. 5
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
Press mode.
) icon to return to ready Select Yes when Add? appears. Select the name and number you want and press OK. 4 5 6 7 When you have finished, select No when Another No.? appears and Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group. press OK. 8 Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Registering a group dial number 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next >Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Group>
screen.
(options) > Add on the touch 2 Enter a group dial number and press OK. 4. Special Features 255 Setting up the fax address book 9 10 Editing group dial numbers Searching address book for an entry 1 Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone Book > View List > Group on the touch screen. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK. Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears. Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?
appears. Press OK to add or delete the number. Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers. Select No at the Another No.? and press OK.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the number. 1 Select ct or Group Dial on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Search & Dial > Speed Dial Enter All or ID and press OK. Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter you want to search. For example, if you want to find the name MOBILE, press the 6 button, which is labeled with MNO. Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode. 2 3 4 11 Printing address book You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list. 4. Special Features 256 Setting up the fax address book 1 Select ct
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Address Book on the touch screen. 2 Press OK. The machine begins printing. 4. Special Features 257 Registering authorized users This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). To send a scanned image, copy image, or fax data through email or via network server safely, you must register account information of authorized users to your local machine using SyncThru Web Service. 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 300). 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 4 Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication. 5 Select Basic Authentication in the Authentication Mode, and select Local Authentication in the AA Method, and click. 6 Click Apply. 7 Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window. 8 Click User Profile > Add. 9 Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-mail Address, and Fax Number. You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s) after this group is created. 10 Click Apply. 4. Special Features 258 Printing features 12 For basic printing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic printing"
on page 53). This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). Changing the default print settings 1 Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings. 2 3 4 For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers. For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. Right-click on your machine. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, select Printing Preferences. For Windows 7/8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select Printing preferences. 13 If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer. 5 Change the settings on each tab. 6 Click OK. If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. Setting your machine as a default machine 1 Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings. 2 For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers. For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. 4. Special Features 259 Printing features 3 4 Select your machine. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default printer has a
, you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer. Using advanced print features XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format. See "Features by model" on page 6. The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or higher. Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print because the printer is out of memory. You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive. For Windows, select the printer XPS driver in the Select Software to Install window. 14 Printing to a file (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. 1 Check the Print to file box in the Print window. 2 Click Print. 3 Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example, c:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 4. Special Features 260 Printing features Understanding special printer features You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the applications Print window to change the print settings. The machine name that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Select the Help menu or click the button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"
on page 56). Item Description Multiple Pages per Side Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 4. Special Features 261 Printing features Item Poster Printing Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together. Description Booklet Printinga 8 9 Double-sided Printing Double-sided Printing (Manual)a Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what paper sizes are available. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without mark). or Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the Double-sided Printing (Manual) option. 4. Special Features 262 Printing features Item Double-sided Printing Double-sided Printing (Manual)a Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine. None: Disables this feature. Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. Description Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing. This option is not available when you use Double-sided Printing (Manual). Paper Options Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the document. Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. 4. Special Features 263 Printing features Item Watermark
(Creating a watermark) a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window. Description Watermark
(Editing a watermark) a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. d Click Update to save the changes. e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Watermark
(Deleting a watermark) Overlaya a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 6). An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your companys letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document. To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image. The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay. 4. Special Features 264 Printing features Item Description Overlaya
(Creating a new page overlay) Overlaya
(Using a page overlay) a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences. b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears. c d In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. C:\Formover). e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. a Click the Advanced tab. b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Overlaya
(Deleting a page overlay) In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. a b Select Edit in the Text drop down list. c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. d Click Delete. e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes. f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 4. Special Features 265 Printing features Item Description This feature is available only if you have installed the mass device or optional memory (see "Variety feature" on page 8). Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. You need to check Storage Options to use this feature (see "Setting Device Options" on page 91). Without installing the mass storage device in the machine, the Ram Disk feature provides only 3 options: Normal, Proof, and Confidential. Print Mode Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory.
- Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.
- Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.
- Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.
- Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing.
- Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.
- Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue, decreasing the computers work load.
- Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time. Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows. Enter Password: If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured, you have to enter the password for the document box.This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel. Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it. 4. Special Features 266 Printing features Item Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission. User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job. Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job. Description Click the question mark(
) from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about. Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru Web Service. Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects the printing information even though the data is snatched on a network. Job Encryption Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the mass storage device is installed. The mass storage device is used to decrypt the printing data (see "Variety feature" on page 8). a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver. 4. Special Features 267 Printing features Using Direct Printing Utility Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created. The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below. For higher versions, you must open the file to print it. Available for Windows OS users only. Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 6). Printing 15 What is Direct Printing Utility?
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your machine to print without having to open the file. To install this program:
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Optional memory or mass storage device should be installed on your machine, to print files using this program. (see "Variety feature" on page 8). You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing. You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing. There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility. 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Direct Printing Utility . The Direct Printing Utility window appears. 2 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click Browse. Select the file you wish to print and click Open. The file is added in the Select Files section. 4 Customize the machine settings for your needs. 5 Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine. 4. Special Features 268 Printing features Using the right-click menu 1 Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing. The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added. Select the machine to use. 2 3 Customize the machine settings. 4 Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine. Mac printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported. 16 Printing a document 1 Open the document to print. 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3 Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK. 4 Open the File menu and click Print. 5 Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print. 6 Click Print. Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following. When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
Printing multiple pages on one sheet You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies. 4. Special Features 269 Printing features 1 Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2 Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. Select the other options to use. 3 4 Click Print. The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of paper. Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option. 3 4 5 Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper. Select the other options to use. If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy. Printing on both sides of the paper Using help Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page 8). Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book binding. Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars. 1 From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu. 2 Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver. 4. Special Features 270 Printing features Linux printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported. 17 Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application. 1 Open the document to print. 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Print Setup for some applications). 3 Choose your paper size, orientation, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click Apply. Open the File menu and click Print. 4 5 6 Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print. Select your machine to print. 7 Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary. 8 Click Print. Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd-even printing (see "Features by model" on page 6). Printing files You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard CUPS directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows you to do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
"lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>"
Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details. Configuring Printer Properties You can change the default printing options or connection type with Printing utility supplied by the OS. 4. Special Features 271 Printing features 1 Launch Printing utility(Go to System > Administration > Printing menu or execute "system-config-printer" command in Terminal program). Select your printer and double-click it. 2 3 Change default printing options or connection type. 4 Click Apply button. Unix printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported (see "Features by model" on page 6). 18 1 Execute printui <file_name_to_print> command. For example, if you are printing document1 printui document1 This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options. Select a printer that has been already added. Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection. Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, press Properties. Press OK to start the print job. 2 3 4 5 Proceeding the print job Changing the machine settings After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print. The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options in printer Properties. The following hot keys may also be used: H for Help, O for OK, A for Apply, and C for Cancel. 4. Special Features 272 Printing features General tab Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according to your requirements. Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick. Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto Selection. Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page. Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper. Text tab Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output. Margins tab Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size selected. Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters. Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd-even printing. Printer-Specific Settings tab Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file. Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper. Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline, Double-line hairline) Image tab In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your document. 4. Special Features 273 Scan features For basic scanning features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic scanning"
on page 65). This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi. Basic scanning method This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 8). 19 You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network. The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see
"Basic Scanning" on page 65). TWAIN: TWAIN is one of the a preset imaging applications. Scanning an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection (see "Scanning from image editing program" on page 278). Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use this program to scan images or documents. We recommend using scan features with the Samsung Easy Document Creator program provided in the supplied sofware CD.
-
See "Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 304. WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable
(see "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 279). USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB memory device. Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See
"Scanning to email" on page 276). FTP/SMB: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP/SMB server (see
"Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 277). 4. Special Features 274 Scan features Setting the scan settings in the computer This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). 20 Scanning from network connected machine This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the network interface (see "Features by model" on page 6). 21 1 Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager (see "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 305). Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD, since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 26). 2 3 4 Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List. Select Scan to PC Settings menu. Select the option you want. Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device. Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device settings. Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering. 5 Press Save > OK. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 2 3 Select
(Scan) > Scan To PC > Network PC on the control panel. Or select Scan > Network PC on the touch screen. If you see Not Available message, check the port connection. Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if necessary. 4. Special Features 275 Scan features ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for
Switch to advanced modeScan to Settings. Password is the 4 digit number registered password for
Settings. Switch to advanced modeScan to 4 5 Select the option you want and press OK. Scanning begins. Scanned image is saved in computers C:\Users\users name\My Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Scanning to email This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). 22 Setting up an email account 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 300). Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP). Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name. 2 3 4 5 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. authentication. Enter the SMTP server login name and password. Press Apply. If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication. Enter the IP address and port number. 6 7 4. Special Features 276 Scan features Scanning and sending an email 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select
(scan) > Scan To Email on the control panel. Or select Scan > Send Email on the touch screen. Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 300). Enter the senders and recipients email address. You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on SyncThru Web Service. Enter an email subject and press OK. Select the file format to scan, and press OK. Enter the SMTP server login name and password. The machine begins scanning and then sends the email. Scanning to FTP/SMB server This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). 23 Setting up an FTP/SMB server 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service (see "Using SyncThru Web Service"
on page 300). Select Address Book > Individual > Add. 2 3 Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB. 4 5 6 Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. of unauthorized people. 7 8 Enter the login name and password. Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain, otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB server. 4. Special Features 277 Scan features Enter the path for saving the scanned image. 24 The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root. The folder properties need to be setup as a share. Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder. 9 10 Press Apply. Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 3 4 5 Select
(scan) > Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP on the control panel. Or select Scan > SMB or FTP on the touch screen. Select a server and scan format you want. The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server. Scanning from image editing program You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 3 Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop. 4 Click File > Import, and select the scanner device. 5 6 Scan and save your scanned image. Set the scan options. 4. Special Features 278 Scan features 25 Scanning using the WIA driver Scan and save your scanned image. 7 26 Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using additional software:
Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 3 Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan. 4 5 New Scan application appears. 6 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences affect the picture. Availabe for Windows OS users only. Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator. Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you install the machine software (see "Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 304). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs. 2 3 Click Samsung Printers, and start Samsung Easy Document Creator. Click Scan (
) from the home screen. 4 Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start. 4. Special Features 279 Scan features 5 Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options). 6 Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview image. Select to Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS. 7 8 Click on Save (Saving a Scan), Send ( E-mailing a Scan), or Share
(Uploading). If there is room on the document glass, more than one item can be scanned at the same time. Use the tool to make multiple selection areas. 27 Mac scanning Scanning from USB connected machine 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 3 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). Start Applications and click Image Capture. If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image Captures help. 4 5 Select the option you want. Scan and save your scanned image. If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning from network connected machine Network or wireless model only (see "Features by model" on page 6). 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network. 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 50). 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture. 4. Special Features 280 Scan features According to OS, follow steps below. For 10.5 Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
-
- Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices. For 10.6 -10.9, select your device below SHARED. Set the scan options on this program. Scan and save your scanned image. If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest version. For more information, refer to the Image Captures help. You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop. You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software. Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Scan Assistant. 4 5 6 28 Linux scanning 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple-scan(If it's not installed, please install it manually to use scan features. For example, you may use "yum install xsane" for rpm package systems and "apt-get install xsane" for deb package systems to install xsane). Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply. 3 4 Click the Scan button. 4. Special Features 281 Fax features For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on page 66). 29 Automatic redialing When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on the country's factory default setting. When the display shows Retry Redial?, press
(Start) button to redial the number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Stop/Clear) button.
(Stop or To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts. 1 Press panel.
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control 2 3 Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want. Select the option you want. Redialing the fax number
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel. 1 Press 2 Select the fax number you want. Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown. 3 When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine automatically begins to send. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears. 30 31 Confirming a transmission When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine beeps and returns to ready mode. When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears
(Stop or Stop/Clear) on the display. If you receive an error message, press to clear the message and try to send the fax again. 4. Special Features 282 Fax features You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
(Menu) > Fax Setup time sending a fax is completed. Press
> Sending > Fax Confirmation on the control panel.
(fax) >
Sending a fax in the computer This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). 32 You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine. To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver. 1 Open the document to be sent. 2 Select Print from the File menu. The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your application. Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window 3 4 Click Print or OK. 5 Enter the recipients numbers and select the option Select the Help menu or click the any option you want to know about. button from the window and click on 6 Click Send. Delaying a fax transmission 33 You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. Press
(fax) on the control panel. 2 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. 4
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel. Press Or select Fax > Delayed Send on the touch screen. Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK. The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document. 5 6 4. Special Features 283 Fax features 7 To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat steps 5. Canceling a reserved fax job 8 9 You can add up to 10 destinations. Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore. Enter the job name and the time. If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time on the following day. The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set. You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Fax Scheduled Jobs on the Press control panel. 1 Press panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control Select the fax job you want and press OK. Press OK when Yes highlights. The selected fax is deleted from memory. Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode. 2 3 4 34 Forwarding a sentfax to another destination You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful. When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service (see"Using SyncThru Web Service" on page 300). Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale. 4. Special Features 284 Fax features 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. Press to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel.
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward > Forward
(fax) >
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Send Forward
> Forward to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen. Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 8). Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and press OK.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Press mode. Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine. 2 3 4 35 Forwarding a received fax You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful. Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale. 1 Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive Forward > Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen. Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 8). To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed, select Forward&Print. 2 3 4 Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and press OK. Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine. 4. Special Features 285 Fax features 37 Sending faxes on both sides of paper This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. 2 Press
(fax) > Fax Feature > Duplex on the control panel. Or select Fax > Select the menu you want > Select Duplex from the sub-
menus > on the touch screen. 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one isde only. 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides. 2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back is rotated 180. To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the originals on the DADF. If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided. 36 3 Press OK. Receiving a fax in the computer This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Press Forward to PC > Forward the control panel. Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive Forward > Forward to PC > Forward on the touch screen. Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List. 1 Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager. 2 3 4 Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings. Select Fax to PC Settings menu. Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF. Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes. Prefix: Select prefix. 4. Special Features 286 Fax features Print received fax: Set to print information for the received fax after receiving the fax. Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to notify receiving a fax. Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with default application. None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or opens the application. Press Save > OK. 5 38 Changing the receive modes 1 Press on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default > Common > Receive Mode on the touch screen. 2 Select the option you want. Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode. Tel: Receives a fax by pressing
(On Hook Dial) and then
(Start) button. Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine is attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax. To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. DRPD: You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 288. This setting may not be available depending on your country. 3 4 Press OK. Press mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready 4. Special Features 287 Fax features 39 41 Receiving manually in Tel mode Receiving faxes with an extension telephone You can receive a fax call by pressing
(On Hook Dial) button and then pressing you can answer calls using the handset (see "Features by model" on page 6).
(Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset, 40 Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive the fax. If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings. If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring. If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation. When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the fax machine. When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you want. While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy and scan features are not available. 42 Receiving faxes using DRPD mode This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. This feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone. 4. Special Features 288 Fax features This setting may not be available depending on your country. 1 Select Mode > DRPD on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default > Common > Receive Mode > DRPD on the touch screen. 2 Call your fax number from another telephone. 3 When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern. When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears. 4 Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2. DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect the machine to another telephone line. After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket. Receiving in secure receiving mode This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). 43 You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes by entering the password. To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > On on the control panel.
(fax) >
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive on the touch screen. Printing received faxes 1 Select on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive
> Print on the touch screen. 2 Enter a four-digit password and press OK. 4. Special Features 289 Fax features 3 The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory. Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad. 44 Printing faxes on both sides of the paper Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). 3 4 2 3 5 Press OK. Press
(Stop/Clear)button to return to ready mode. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. 45 Receiving faxes in memory 2 Press on the control panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print Off: Prints in Normal mode. Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book. Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax. If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be processed at the same time. 4. Special Features 290 Using shared folder features This feature allows you to use the machines memory as a shared folder. The advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder through your computers window. 47 Using the shared folder You can use the shared folder exactly like the normal computer. Create, edit and delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You also store the scanned data in the shared folder. You can directly print files stored on a the shared folder. You can print TIFF, JPEG and PRN files. 46 This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 6). You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device
(see "Variety feature" on page 8). The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user s access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users. Creating a shared folder 1 Open the Windows Explore window from the computer. 2 Enter the printers address example: in the address fieldand press the Enter key or click Go. 3 Create a new folder under nfsroot directory. 4. Special Features 291 Using optional device features Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page 8). 48 From the printer driver If you install the optional device, you can use advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window. Check the mass storage or RAM disk option in Device Options, then you can select the various features from Print Mode (see "Setting Device Options" on page 91). 1 Open the document you want to print. 2 3 Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 4 Click Properties or Preferences . 5 Click the each tab then select Print Mode. 6 Select the option you want (see "Understanding special printer features"
on page 261). Select OK. 7 49 From the control panel If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you can use these features from the
(Menu)buttonSystem Setup> Job Manage.. Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Active JobAll of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner. Secured Job: You can print or delete a secured job. Shows the list of secured jobs the user has set in the printer driver. You need to enter the user name and password set in the printer driver. Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job. 4. Special Features 292 Using optional device features File PolicyYou can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it. 4. Special Features 293 5. Useful Management Tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. Accessing management tools Easy Capture Manager Samsung Easy Color Manager Samsung AnyWeb Print Easy Eco Driver Using SyncThru Web Service Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Using Samsung Printer Status Using Samsung Printer Experience 295 296 297 298 299 300 304 305 308 310 Accessing management tools Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers. 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2 From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs. For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Apps. Find Samsung Printers. 3 4 Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools. 5 Click the management tool you want to use. After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start menu > Programs or All Programs. For Windows 8, after installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile. 5. Useful Management Tools 295 Easy Capture Manager Available for Windows OS users only. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 6). Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited. 5. Useful Management Tools 296 Samsung Easy Color Manager Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties, such as brightness, contrast, and saturation. Color tone change can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine. Available for Windows and Mac OS users only. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 6). Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like. Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). 5. Useful Management Tools 297 Samsung AnyWeb Print Available for Windows OS users only. This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 6). This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program. Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). 5. Useful Management Tools 298 Easy Eco Driver This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 6). Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 6). With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing. To use this application, Printer Properties > Basic tab > Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox should be checked. If you did not check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the printer properties but want to use Easy Eco Driver, select Eco Printing Preview in the Favorites tab each time you print. Easy Eco Driver also allows you to do simple editing such as removing images and texts and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset. How to use:
1 Open a document to print. 2 Print the document. A preview window appears. 3 Select the options you want to apply to the document. You can see the preview of the applied features. 4 Click Print. 5. Useful Management Tools 299 Using SyncThru Web Service Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru Web Service. SyncThru Web Service explanation in this users guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Network model only (see "Software" on page 6). 1 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website. 2 Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons. ID: admin Password: sec00000 1 Accessing SyncThru Web Service 1 Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 Your machines embedded website opens. Logging into SyncThru Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service, you need to log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but you wont have access to Settings tab and Security tab. SyncThru Web Service overview Some tabs may not appear depending on your model. 2 Information tab This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an error report. Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their severity. Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge. 5. Useful Management Tools 300 Using SyncThru Web Service Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and duplex. Current Settings: Shows the machines and networks information. Security Information: Shows the machines security information. Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail address, and font reports. Settings tab User Access Control: Classifies users into several groups according to each users role. Each users authorization, authentication and accounting will be controlled by the groups role definition. System Log: The System Log contains settings related to logs of device events.
-
-
Log Configuration: The Log Configuration section contains settings related to saving logs. Log Viewer: The Log Viewer section contains options to view logs stored locally on the device. This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. Maintenance tab Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine. Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets options such as TCP/IP and network protocols. This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu. Security tab This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. System Security: Sets the system administrators information and also enables or disables machine features. Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x, and Authentication servers. Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machines firmware. Contact Information: Shows the contact information. Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check information. License Management: License Management provides settings for installed applications and application licenses. Cloning: You can import or export (transfer) various settings (machine setting, network information, address book, etc.) between devices that have the Cloningfeature in SyncThru Web Service. 5. Useful Management Tools 301 Using SyncThru Web Service 3 E-mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machines status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. 1 Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 3 4 Your machines embedded website opens. From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification. If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network environment before setting e-mail notification. Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification. 5 Click Add button to add e-mail notification user. Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items you want to receive an alert for. 6 Click Apply. If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact a network administrator. 4 Setting the system administrators information This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. 1 Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2 3 Your machines embedded website opens. From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator 5. Useful Management Tools 302 Using SyncThru Web Service 4 Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email address. 5 Click Apply. 5. Useful Management Tools 303 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether youre a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom sharing scanned pictures from last years birthday party, Samsung Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools. The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features below:
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures. Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and images. Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an editable text format. Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner. SNS Upload: Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or existing images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS). E-Book Conversion: Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as one e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format. Plug-in: Scan, fax, and convert to E-Book directly from the Microsoft Office program. Click the Help (
want to know about.
) button from the window and click on any option you 5. Useful Management Tools 304 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Software" on page 6). Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 6). For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager. The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows:
The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are using. Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button. 5 Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager To open the program:
For Windows, Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Printer list 1 The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer and network printers added by network discovery (Windows only). For Mac, Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer Manager. 5. Useful Management Tools 305 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Printer information This area gives you general information about your machine. You can check information, such as the machines model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine status. You can view the online Users Guide. Troubleshooting button: This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs. You can directly open the necessary section in the users guide. Application information Includes links for changing to the advanced settings
(switching UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, help, and about. button is used to change the user The interface to the advanced settings user interface
(see "Advanced settings user interface overview"
on page 306). 2 3 4 5 6 6 Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This section also includes links to applications in the advanced settings. If you connect your machine to a network, the SyncThru Web Service icon is enabled. Contents area Displays information about the selected machine, remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary based on the machine selected. Some machines do not have this feature. Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online. Select the Help menu or click the any option you want to know about. button from the window and click on Advanced settings user interface overview The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible for managing the network and machines. 5. Useful Management Tools 306 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Device Settings You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, network, and print information. Scan to PC Settings This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles. Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device. Basic tab: Contains general scan and device settings. Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering. Fax to PC Settings This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected device. Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device. Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and allows more options to be set. Alert Settings (Windows only) This menu includes settings related to error alerting. Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received. Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email. Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts. Job Accounting Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user. This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting software such as SyncThru or CounThru admin software. 5. Useful Management Tools 307 Using Samsung Printer Status The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status. Icon Mean Description The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this users guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
(see "Specifications" on page 129). Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 6). Normal Warning The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no errors or warnings. The machine is in a state where an error might occur in the future. For example, it might be in toner low status, which may lead to toner empty status. Error The machine has at least one error. 7 Samsung Printer Status overview If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software. You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button. These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Toner Level 1 You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge. The machine and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use. Some machines do not have this feature. 2 Option You can set printing job alert related settings. 5. Useful Management Tools 308 Using Samsung Printer Status 3 4 Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online. Users Guide You can view the online Users Guide. This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs. You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the users guide. 5 Close Close the window. 5. Useful Management Tools 309 Using Samsung Printer Experience Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit Samsungs web site, and check connected machine information. This application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection. 8 Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience To open the application, From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience (
)tile. The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as described in the following table:
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using. 1 6 2 3 4 5 Printer Information 1 This area gives you general information about your machine. You can check information, such as the machines status, location, IP address, and remaining toner level. 5. Useful Management Tools 310 Using Samsung Printer Experience 2 User Guide You can view the online Users Guide. You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature. 9 Adding/Deleting Printers This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs. You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the users guide. 3 4 5 6 Order Supplies Click on this button to order replacement toner cartridges online. You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature. Visit Samsung Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature. Printer Settings Device List &
Latest Scanned Image You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking, and print information through SyncThru Web Service. Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This button will be disabled if your machine is connected via USB cable. The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung Printer Experience Under the device, you can see the latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be connected to a network to scan from here. This section is for the users with multi-functional printers. If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below. You can only add/delete network connected printers. Adding a printer 1 From the Charms, select Settings. Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings. Select Add Printer Select the printer you want to add. You can see the added printer. If you see mark, you can also click mark to add printers. 2 3 5. Useful Management Tools 311 Using Samsung Printer Experience Deleting a printer 1 From the Charms, select Settings. Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings. Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation. 4 5 Click the Print button to start the print job. Select Remove Printer Select the printer you want to delete. 2 3 4 Click Yes. You can see that the deleted printer is removed from the screen. 10 Printing from Windows 8 This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen. Basic printing 1 Open the document to print. 2 3 Select your printer from the list From the Charms, select Devices. 5. Useful Management Tools 312 Using Samsung Printer Experience Cancelling a print job Basic tab If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows:
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing the control panel.
(Stop/Clear) button on Opening more settings The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or options. Basic This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies, orientation, and document type. You can set up more printing parameters. Eco settings From the Charms, select Devices. 1 Open the document you want to print. 2 3 4 Click More settings. Select your printer from the list This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media. 5. Useful Management Tools 313 Using Samsung Printer Experience Advanced tab Security tab Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that these features are not supported. Paper settings This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications. Layout settings This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents. Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission. Confidential Printing This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print using it. 5. Useful Management Tools 314 Using Samsung Printer Experience 7 Click Scan (
)and save the image. When you place the originals in the ADF (or DADF), Prescan (
) is not available. You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected. Scanning from Windows 8 This section is for the users with multi-functional printers. 11 Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer. Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning. 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the documents face up into the document feeder. 2 Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen. 3 Click Scan (
4 Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and resolution.
). 5 Click Prescan (
6 Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
)to check the image. rotate and mirror. 5. Useful Management Tools 315 6. Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. Paper feeding problems Power and cable connecting problems Printing problems Printing quality problems Copying problems Scanning problems Faxing problems Operating system problems 317 318 319 323 331 332 334 336 For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings, refer to the troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 198). Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam. Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray. Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the manual feeding in tray. An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes. 6. Troubleshooting 317 Power and cable connecting problems Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems. Condition The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Suggested solutions Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power/Wake Up) button on the control, press it. Disconnect the machines cable and reconnect it. 6. Troubleshooting 318 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a Wake Up) button on the control, press it.
(Power/
The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in Windows. Check the machine for the following:
The cover is not closed. Close the cover. Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 111). No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 40). The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). If a system error occurs, contact your service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 22). The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. 6. Troubleshooting 319 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct. The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Uninstall and reinstall the machines driver. The machine is malfunctioning. Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. Contact a service representative. The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Get more hard disk space and print the document again. The output tray is full. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on page 56). A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on page 56). Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray. Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. 6. Troubleshooting 320 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the applications printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. See "Redistributing toner" on page 84. See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Using damp/wet paper can cause vapor [white smoke] during printing. This is not a problem, just keep printing. If you are bothered by the smoke [vapor], then replace the paper with fresh paper from an unopened ream. The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. 6. Troubleshooting 321 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print special-sized paper, such as billing paper. The printed billing paper is curled. Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 55). The paper type setting does not match. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 6. Troubleshooting 322 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. Condition Light or faded print Suggested solutions If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver. A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine
(see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 6. Troubleshooting 323 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Toner specks A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c Dropouts A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C White Spots The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. If white spots appear on the page:
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. 6. Troubleshooting 324 Printing quality problems Condition Vertical lines Suggested solutions If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. Black or color background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
Change to a lighter weight paper. Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading. Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 84). Toner smear Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). Check the paper type and quality. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). 6. Troubleshooting 325 Printing quality problems Condition Vertical repetitive defects Background scatter A Suggested solutions If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem. If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 84). Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem. 6. Troubleshooting 326 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper. Page skew A aBb C A aBb C A aBb C A aBb C A aBb C c Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl. Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray. 6. Troubleshooting 327 Printing quality problems Condition Wrinkles or creases Suggested solutions Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). Solid color or black pages A The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative. 6. Troubleshooting 328 Printing quality problems Condition Loose toner Suggested solutions Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). Check the paper type, thickness, and quality. Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Character voids A Horizontal stripes Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around. The paper may not meet paper specifications. If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative. 6. Troubleshooting 329 Printing quality problems Condition Curl Suggested solutions If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray. Change the printers paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 55). An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets Loose toner Light printor contamination occurs Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above. The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see
"Altitude adjustment" on page 250). 6. Troubleshooting 330 Copying problems Condition Suggested solutions Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 60). Smears, lines, marks, or spots appear on copies. If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies. If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 101). Copy image is skewed. Blank copies print out. Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide. The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 97). Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder. If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. Image rubs off the copy easily. Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package. In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time. Frequent copy paper jams occur. Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary. Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner. Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 131). Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared. Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other documents that use more toner. The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made. Turn the machine off and back on. 6. Troubleshooting 331 Scanning problems Condition Suggested solutions The scanner does not work. Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
"Loading originals" on page 50). There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate. Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly. Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the printer cable. Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001). Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text. Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how to set BIOS, refer to your computer users guide. The unit scans very slowly. 6. Troubleshooting 332 Scanning problems Suggested solutions There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished. The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again. The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off. The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly. Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer. The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off. Condition Message appears on your computer screen:
Device cant be set to the H/W mode you want. Port is being used by another program. Port is disabled. Scanner is busy receiving or printing data. When the current job is completed, try again. Invalid handle. Scanning has failed. 6. Troubleshooting 333 Faxing problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not working, there is no display, or the buttons are not working. Unplug the power cord and plug it in again. Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet. Ensure that the power is turned on. No dial tone. Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 22). Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone. The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly. The original does not feed into the machine. Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list. Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick or thin. Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed. The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative (see "Available maintenance parts" on page 81). Faxes are not received automatically. The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 287). Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 131). Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem. The machine does not send. Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass. Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax. The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor-quality. The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty. A noisy phone line can cause line errors. Check your machine by making a copy. A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 86). 6. Troubleshooting 334 Faxing problems Condition Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched. There are lines on the originals you sent. The machine dials a number, but the connection with the other fax machine fails. Faxes do not store in memory. Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages, with a small strip of text at the top. The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam. Suggested solutions Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 101). The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask them to solve the problem on their side. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service. You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again. 6. Troubleshooting 335 Operating system problems Common Windows problems Condition File in Use message appears during installation. General Protection Fault, Exception OE, Spool 32, or Illegal Operation messages appear. Fail To Print, A printer timeout error occurred message appear. Samsung Printer Experience is not shown when you click more settings. Machine information is not displayed when you click the device in the Devices and Printers. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. Suggested solutions Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Samsung Printer Experience is not installed. Download the app from theWindows Store and install it. Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties) If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD. Refer to the Microsoft Windows Users Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. 1 6. Troubleshooting 336 Operating system problems Common Mac problems Condition The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. Suggested solutions It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. Some letters are not displayed normally during cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the cover page. When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader. Refer to the Mac Users Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages. 2 6. Troubleshooting 337 Operating system problems Common Linux problems Condition Suggested solutions There is no xsane nor simple-
scan application on my Linux machine. For some Linux distributions, there might be no default scan application. To use scan features, install one of scan applications using download center supplied by the OS(ex. Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu, Install/Remove Software for openSUSE, Software for Fedora). Scanner can not be found via network. For some Linux distributions, strong firewall is enabled and it may block our installer from opening the necessary port for searching network devices. In such a case, open the snmp port - 22161 manually or disable the firewall temporarily while using the device. When printing more than one copy, the second copy does not print. Unchecking the collate option in the Print Dialog does not work. Printing always works with duplex. The problem occurs on Ubuntu 12.04 due to the problem in standard CUPS filter 'pdftops'. Update 'cups-filters' package to version 1.0.18 to fix the problem ('pdftops' is a part of 'cups-filters' package). For some distributions, GNOME Print Dialog has an issue handling the collate option. As workaround, set the default value of collate option to False using the system's printing utility(execute "system-config-printer" in the Terminal program). This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9.10 CUPS package. Update CUPS version to 1.4.1-5ubuntu2.2. Printer is not added through system's printing utility. The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the defect in 'system-config-printer' package of the Debian 7 (http://bugs.debian.org/cgi-
bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=662813 in Debian bug tracking system). Please use another way to add printer (CUPS WebUI for example) Paper size and orientation are disabled in the Print Dialog when opening text files. The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it's related to 'leafpad' text editor on Fedora 19. Please use other text editors like 'gedit'. 3 6. Troubleshooting 338 Operating system problems Refer to the Linux Users Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. 4 Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used. Problem Possible cause Solution The PostScript file cannot be printed The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly. Install the PostScript driver (see "Software Installation" on page 156). Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing. If the problem persists, contact a service representative. Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex. You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory. A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript. Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine. The optional tray is not selected in the driver The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray. Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the tray option (see "Setting Device Options" on page 91). When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader. Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader. 6. Troubleshooting 339 Operating system problems 6. Troubleshooting 340 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center. Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite BOTSWANA 8007260000 BOSNIA 051 133 1999 ALGERIA ANGOLA 0800 100 100 91-726-7864 ARGENTINA 0800-333-3733 ARMENIA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA 0-800-05-555 1300 362 603 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/
n_africa www.samsung.com www.samsung.com.ar www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/au www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 www.samsung.com 8000-4726 BAHRAIN www.samsung.com/ae
(English) www.samsung.com/
ae_ar (Arabic) BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com 02-201-24-18 BELGIUM BOLIVIA 800-10-7260 www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch) www.samsung.com/
be_fr (French) www.samsung.com BRAZIL BULGARIA BURUNDI CAMEROON CANADA CHILE CHINA COLOMBIA www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com.br 0800-124-421 (Demais cidades e regies) 4004-0000 (Capitais e grandes centros) 07001 33 11 , share cost tariff www.samsung.com/bg 200 7095- 0077 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 02-24828200 400-810-5858 01-8000112112 Bogot: 6001272 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/
www.samsung.com/ca
(English) www.samsung.com/
ca_fr (French) www.samsung.com/cl www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/co Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 341 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite 0-800-507-7267 COSTA RICA www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) 800-6225 EL SALVADOR CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG (062 726 786) www.samsung.com/hr Cote D Ivoire 8000 0077 www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/
CYPRUS CZECH 8009 4000 only from landline www.samsung.com/gr 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com DENMARK 70 70 19 70 1-800-751-2676 DOMINICA DRC ECUADOR EGYPT EIRE 499999 1-800-10-7267 08000-726786 0818 717100 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) www.samsung.com/ee www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/fr www.samsung.com ESTONIA FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY 800-7267 030-6227 515 01 48 63 00 00 0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw. 0180 6 7267864*
[HHP] 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw. 0180 6 67267864* (*0,20 /Anruf aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk max. 0,60 /Anruf) GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 GHANA GREECE 0800-10077 0302-200077 80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726 7864) only from land line
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
africa_en/
www.samsung.com/gr Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 342 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite 1-800-299-0013 800-27919267
(852) 3698-4698 GUATEMALA HONDURAS HONG KONG www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) www.samsung.com/hk
(Chinese) www.samsung.com/
hk_en (English) JAPAN JORDAN 0120-327-527 800-22273 065777444 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
Levant (English) KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799) www.samsung.com KENYA 0800 545 545 183-2255 (183-CALL) KUWAIT www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/ae
(English) www.samsung.com/
ae_ar (Arabic) KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu INDIA INDONESIA IRAN ITALIA 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 0800-112-8888 (Toll Free) 021-5699-7777 021-8255 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 800.Msamsung
(800.67267864) JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/in LATVIA 8000-7267 LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/id MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com MEXICO MOLDOVA MONGOLIA 0-800-614-40
+7-800-555-55-55 MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www.samsung.com/lv www.samsung.com/lt www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
my www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 343 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite MOZAMBIQUE 847267864 / 827267864 www.samsung.com PARAGUAY 009 800 542 0001 NAMIBIA NIGERIA 08 197 267864 0800-726-7864 NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864)
( 0,10/min) www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/
africa_en/
www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com/nz 00-1800-5077267 NICARAGUA NORWAY 815-56 480 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) OMAN PAKISTAN PANAMA 0800-Samsung (72678) 800-7267 www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/ae
(English) www.samsung.com/
ae_ar (Arabic) www.samsung.com/
pk/
www.samsung.com/
latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/
latin_en (English) www.samsung.com.py www.samsung.com/pe www.samsung.com/ph www.samsung.com/pl PERU PHILIPPINES POLAND 0-800-777-08 Desde celulares por favor llamar al nmero 336 8686 1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]
1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile]
02-4222111 [Other landline]
0 801-1SAMSUNG(172-678) *
lub +48 22 607-93-33 **
[HHP] 0 801-672-678* lub +48 22 607-93-33**
* (cakowity koszt poczenia jak za 1 impuls wedug taryfy operatora)
** (koszt poczenia wedug taryfy operatora) PORTUGAL 808 20-SAMSUNG (808 20 7267) www.samsung.com PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 344 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite 800-2255 (800-CALL) QATAR RWANDA 9999 www.samsung.com/ae
(English) www.samsung.com/
ae_ar (Arabic) www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) SYRIA 18252273 www.samsung.com/ch www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/
www.samsung.com/
Levant (English) www.samsung.com/ro TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com 08008 SAMSUNG (08008 726 7864) TOLL FREE No. 800-00-0077 9200-21230 8-800-555-55-55 011 321 6899 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/sa
(Arabic) www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/
www.samsung.com/rs ROMANIA RUSSIA SAUDI ARABIA SENEGAL SERBIA SINGAPORE SLOVAKIA 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/sg 0800 - SAMSUNG(0800-726 786) www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SPAIN SUDAN SWEDEN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678) www.samsung.com 1969 www.samsung.com 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com TAIWAN TANZANIA THAILAND TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO 0800-329-999 0685 88 99 00 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com/tw www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/th 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com U.A.E U.K U.S.A U.S.A
(Mobile Phones) 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 0330 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/us
[HHP] 1-888-987-HELP(4357) www.samsung.com UGANDA 0800 300 300 www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 345 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite 0-800-502-000 UKRAINE www.samsung.com/ua
(Ukrainian) www.samsung.com/
ua_ru (Russian) URUGUAY 000 405 437 33 www.samsung.com UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com/ve VIETNAM ZAMBIA 1 800 588 889 0211 350370 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 346 Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this users guide. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. 802.11 AppleTalk 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. 802.11b/g/n BIT Depth 802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. Glossary 347 Glossary BOOTP Coverage Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. Collation DADF Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. Glossary 348 Glossary DHCP DPI A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts. DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data. DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network. Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle. DNS Duty Cycle The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. Glossary 349 Glossary ECM EtherTalk Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise. A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. Emulation FDI Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Glossary 350 Glossary Gateway IEEE A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. Grayscale IEEE 1284 A shades of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots. Mass storage device Mass storage device, commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-
volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. Glossary 351 Glossary IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. IPX/SPX JBIG IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. Glossary 352 Glossary LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-
T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted. Glossary 353 Glossary NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format. Glossary 354 Glossary PostScript Protocol PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. PS See PostScript. PSTN Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. Glossary 355 Glossary SMB TCP/IP Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. Glossary 356 Glossary TWAIN Watermark An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac operating systems. A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP. Glossary 357 Glossary WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. WPS The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer. XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-
independent document format. Glossary 358
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2014-06-19 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2014-06-19
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005810205
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
19 Chapin Rd., Building D
|
||||
1 |
Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
A3L
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
SLC2670FW
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
J**** C********
|
||||
1 | Title |
General Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 |
j******@samsung.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Lab., Inc.
|
||||
1 | Name |
R**** O****
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
6660-B Dobbin Road
|
||||
1 |
Columbia, Maryland 21045
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Printer | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Global CS Center
|
||||
1 | Name |
P****** N********
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 |
p******@samsung.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 19 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC